IBM Portable Media Storage DS5020 User Manual
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in “Safety” on page xiii and  
“Notices” on page 197.  
First Edition (July 2009)  
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009.  
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract  
with IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii  
About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
Who should read this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
DS5020 and DS4000-family storage subsystem installation tasks - General  
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx  
Getting information, help, and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv  
Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv  
Using the documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv  
Finding DS5020 and DS4000-family readme files. . . . . . . . . . . xxiv  
Web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv  
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi  
Hardware service and support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi  
Fire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii  
Chapter 1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Base DS5020 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Operating system support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Fibre Channel defined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
SATA defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
iSCSI defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Inventory checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Product updates and support notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Best practices guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Storage subsystem components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Enhanced Disk Drive Modules (E-DDMs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Connectors, switch, and enclosure ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Setting up IP addresses for DS5020 storage controllers . . . . . . . . 11  
AC power supply and fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Battery units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
SFP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Software and hardware compatibility and upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Software and firmware support code upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Determining firmware levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Area requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Shipping dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Environmental requirements and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Airflow and heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Shock and vibration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Acoustic noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and site wiring requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Heat output, airflow, and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Tools and hardware required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Preparing the rack cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Installing the support rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Installing the DS5020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Removing the CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Removing a controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Removing an ac power supply and fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Removing an E-DDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Installing the DS5020 into a rack on the support rails . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Replacing the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Replacing a controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Replacing an ac power supply and fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Replacing an E-DDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Enclosure ID settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Fibre Channel loop and ID settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Working with SFPs and fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Handling fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Installing SFP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Removing SFP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Using LC-LC Fibre Channel cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Connecting an LC-LC cable to an SFP module . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Removing an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Connecting storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020 . . . . . . . . . 54  
Redundant drive channel pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Overview of steps to connect storage expansion enclosures to a storage  
subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
DS5020 storage subsystem drive cabling topologies . . . . . . . . . . 57  
One DS5020 and one storage expansion enclosure . . . . . . . . . 59  
One DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . 60  
One DS5020 and three storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . 62  
One DS5020 and four storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . 63  
One DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . 64  
One DS5020 and two or more storage expansion enclosures in a mixed  
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
DS5020 storage subsystem and supported storage expansion enclosure drive  
cabling schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
DS5020 storage subsystem drive cabling rules . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
One DS5020 and one EXP520 storage expansion enclosure . . . . . . 70  
One DS5020 and two EXP520 storage expansion enclosures. . . . . . 71  
One DS5020 and three or more EXP520 storage expansion enclosures  
72  
Storage expansion enclosure settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Fibre Channel loop and ID settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Storage expansion enclosure ID settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Connecting secondary interface cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Configuring the storage subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Storage subsystem management methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
iv IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Host-agent (in-band) management method. . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Direct (out-of-band) management method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Connecting hosts to the DS5020 using Fibre Channel host ports . . . . . 82  
Fibre Channel and iSCSI connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Fibre Channel host loop configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Redundant Fibre Channel host loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
iSCSI configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
DS5020 host iSCSI configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Installing the storage subsystem configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Cabling the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Performing the DS5020 Health Check process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Hardware responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Powering on the storage subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Turning on the storage subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Installing the DS Storage Manager client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Monitoring status through software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Finding controller, storage expansion enclosure, and drive information . . . 99  
Firmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Troubleshooting the storage subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Checking the LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
AC power supply and fan unit LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Front LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Battery unit LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Controller LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Seven-segment numeric display LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Powering off the storage subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Turning off the storage subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Performing an emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Restoring power after an unexpected shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Recovering from an overheated power supply and fan unit . . . . . . . . 114  
Cache memory and cache battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Cache memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Subsystem cache battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Chapter 5. Replacing components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Service Action Allowed Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Replacing a controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Working with hot-swap E-DDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Installing hot-swap E-DDMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Replacing hot-swap E-DDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Replacing multiple E-DDMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Replacing all E-DDMs at the same time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Replacing the E-DDMs one at a time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Verifying the link rate setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Replacing an ac power supply and fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Replacing a battery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Replacing an SFP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Replacing a midplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Chapter 6. Hardware maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
General checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Solving problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Appendix A. Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Identification numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Storage subsystem and controller information record . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Sample information record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Installed device records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Appendix B. Rack mounting templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Appendix C. Specifications for non-IBM rack installation . . . . . . . 171  
General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack or  
cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Appendix D. Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
DS Storage Manager Version 10 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
DS5020 storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
DS4800 storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
DS4700 storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
DS4500 storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
DS4400 storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
DS4300 storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
DS4200 Express storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
DS4100 Storage subsystem library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
DS5000 and DS4000 storage expansion enclosure documents. . . . . . . 192  
Other DS5000 and DS4000-related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Appendix F. Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Particulate contamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Documentation format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . . 200  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . . . . . 200  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . . 200  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement . . . . . . . . 200  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . . 201  
Taiwanese Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . 201  
Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische  
Verträglichkeit von Geräten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC  
EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A . . . . . . . . 202  
People's Republic of China Class A warning statement. . . . . . . . . 202  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
202  
Korean Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
vi IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
1. DS5020 hot-swap drive bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
2. Back view; controllers with two standard Fibre Channel host expansion channels . . . . . . . 10  
3. Back view; controllers with two standard and two optional Fibre Channel host expansion channels 10  
4. Back view; controllers with two standard Fibre Channel host expansion channels and two optional  
iSCSI host expansion channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
5. Power supply and fan unit components for the DS5020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
6. Power supply and fan unit and airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
7. Backup battery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
8. SFP module and fiber-optic cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
9. DS5020 dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
10. DS5020 airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
11. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
12. Example of DS5020 serial number, machine type, and model number location . . . . . . . . 28  
13. Front rack mounting template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
14. Rear rack mounting template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
15. Installing the support rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
16. Removing and replacing a controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
17. Removing a power supply and fan unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
18. Removing an E-DDM CRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
19. Installing the DS5020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
20. Securing the DS5020 to the rack cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
21. Removing and replacing a controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
22. Replacing a power supply and fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
23. Replacing an E-DDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
24. Storage subsystem seven-segment enclosure IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
25. Bending and looping specifications for fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
26. SFP module and protective cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
27. Installing an SFP module into the host port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
28. Unlocking the SFP module latch - plastic variety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
29. Unlocking the SFP module latch - wire variety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
30. LC-LC Fibre Channel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
31. Removing fiber-optic cable protective caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
32. Inserting an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable into an SFP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
33. LC-LC Fibre Channel cable lever and latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
34. Removing the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
35. Example of a redundant drive channel pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
36. DS5020 storage subsystem ports and controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
37. Cabling for one DS5020 and one storage expansion enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
38. Cabling for one DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
39. Incorrect cabling of one DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . . 61  
40. Cabling for one DS5020 and three storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
41. Cabling for one DS5020 and four storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
42. Cabling for one DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
43. Cabling for one DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
44. Cabling for one DS5020 and two or more storage expansion enclosures in a mixed environment  
67  
45. DS5020 drive ports connected to EXP810 ESM ports labeled 1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
46. Cabling for one DS5020 and one EXP520 storage expansion enclosure . . . . . . . . . . 70  
47. One DS5020 and two EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of DS5020 drive ports 71  
48. One DS5020 and three EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of DS5020 drive  
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
49. One DS5020 and four EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of DS5020 drive ports 74  
50. One DS5020 and a maximum of six EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of  
DS5020 drive ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
51. Ethernet and serial port locations on DS5020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
52. Host-agent (in-band) managed storage subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
53. Direct (out-of-band) managed storage subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
54. Location of host cables on RAID controllers on the DS5020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
55. Cabling diagram for two redundant host connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
56. Examples of redundant host direct attached Fibre Channel SAN configurations . . . . . . . . 85  
57. Example of a single SAN fabric configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
58. Example of a dual SAN fabric configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
59. Example of two storage subsystems in a dual SAN environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
60. Example of a two-cluster configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
61. Example of a single-host, multiple-port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
62. Example of a multiple-host, multiple-port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
63. Example of iSCSI and Fibre Channel hosts, multiple-port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
64. Example of an incorrect configuration: Single-host, iSCSI and Fibre Channel. . . . . . . . . 90  
65. Example of a multiple-host, multiple-port, multiple-switch configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
66. Power supply and fan unit LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
67. Front LEDs and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
68. Battery unit LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
69. LEDs, controls, and connectors of controllers with two standard Fibre Channel host expansion  
channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
70. LEDs, controls, and connectors of controllers with two standard and two optional Fibre Channel  
host expansion channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
71. LEDs, controls, and connectors of controllers with two standard Fibre Channel host expansion  
channels and two optional iSCSI host expansion channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
72. Numeric display LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
73. Cache Active LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
74. Battery unit LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
75. Unlocking the SFP module latch - plastic variety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
76. Unlocking the SFP module latch - wire variety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
77. Removing a controller from the DS5020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
78. Installing a controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
79. Hot-swap E-DDM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
80. E-DDM CRU handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
81. Link rate LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
82. Link rate switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
83. Replacing a power supply and fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
84. Removing and replacing a battery unit from the controller chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
85. Replacing an SFP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
86. Front cage frame screw locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
87. Screws holding the top and bottom sides of the chassis to the cage frame . . . . . . . . . 151  
88. DS5020 storage subsystem parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
89. Front rack mounting template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
90. Rear rack mounting template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
91. Top View of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
92. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
93. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
x
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
1. Where to find DS5020 and DS4000-family installation and configuration procedures . . . . . . xx  
2. DS5020 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
3. DS5020 component weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
4. DS5020 shipping carton dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
5. Temperature and humidity requirements for storage subsystem when in storage or in transit  
6. Temperature and humidity requirements for storage subsystem in a typical Information Technology  
21  
(IT) or office environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
7. DS5020 altitude ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
8. DS5020 power and heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
9. Random vibration power spectral density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
10. DS5020 sound levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
11. DS5020 ac power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
12. Power supply and fan unit LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
13. Front LEDs and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
14. Battery unit LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
15. Rear controller LEDs, controls, and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
16. Host and drive channel LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
17. Numeric display diagnostic codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
18. Drive LED activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
19. Data transfer rates for drive modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
20. Symptom-to-FRU index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
21. Parts listing (DS5020 storage subsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
22. Storage subsystem and controller information record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
23. Sample information record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
24. Hard disk drive record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
25. IBM power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
26. DS Storage Manager Version 10 titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
27. DS5020 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
28. DS4800 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
29. DS4700 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
30. DS4500 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
31. DS4400 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
32. DS4300 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
33. DS4200 Express storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
34. DS4100 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
35. DS5000 and DS4000 storage expansion enclosure document titles by user tasks . . . . . . 192  
36. DS5000 and DS4000-related document titles by user tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
37. DS Storage Manager alternate keyboard operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
38. Limits for particulates and gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xii IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
The caution and danger statements that this document contains can be referenced  
in the multilingual IBM® Safety Information document that is provided with your IBM  
System Storage™ DS5020 Storage Subsystem. Each caution and danger statement  
is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the translated  
document.  
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or  
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the  
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure, step, or  
situation.  
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous  
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially  
hazardous procedure step or situation.  
v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or  
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which  
damage could occur.  
Before installing this product, read the following danger and caution notices.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 1:  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is  
hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,  
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical  
storm.  
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical  
outlet.  
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to  
this product.  
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal  
cables.  
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or  
structural damage.  
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,  
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless  
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.  
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when  
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached  
devices.  
To Connect:  
To Disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
xiv IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only an equivalent type battery  
recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a  
lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by the same  
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
a
Class 1 Laser statement  
Safety xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Apparell À Laser de Calsse 1  
IEC 825-11993 CENELEC EN 60 825  
Statement 4:  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
xvi IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following  
label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
Statement 30:  
CAUTION:  
To reduce the risk of electric shock or energy hazards:  
v This equipment must be installed by trained service personnel in a  
restricted-access location, as defined by the NEC and IEC 60950-1, First  
Edition, The Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment.  
v Connect the equipment to a reliably grounded safety extra low voltage  
(SELV) source. An SELV source is a secondary circuit that is designed so  
that normal and single fault conditions do not cause the voltages to exceed  
a safe level (60 V direct current).  
v The branch circuit overcurrent protection must be rated 20 A.  
v Use 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) or 2.5 mm2 copper conductor only, not  
exceeding 4.5 meters in length.  
v Incorporate a readily available approved and rated disconnect device in the  
field wiring.  
CAUTION:  
This unit has more than one power source. To remove all power from the unit,  
all dc MAINS must be disconnected.  
Safety xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cable Warning:  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories  
sold with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of  
California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash  
hands after handling.  
xviii IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this document  
This document provides instructions for installing and customizing the configuration  
of your IBM System Storage DS5020 storage subsystem. It also provides  
maintenance procedures and troubleshooting information.  
Who should read this document  
This document is intended for system operators and service technicians who have  
extensive knowledge of Fibre Channel and network technology.  
How this document is organized  
Chapter 1, “Introduction,” on page 1 describes the IBM System Storage DS5020  
storage subsystem. This chapter includes an inventory checklist and an overview of  
the storage subsystem features, operating specifications, and components.  
Chapter 2, “Installing the storage subsystem,” on page 27 contains information  
about how to install the DS5020 storage subsystem in a standard rack cabinet and  
setting the interface options.  
Chapter 3, “Cabling the storage subsystem,” on page 45 contains Fibre Channel  
and power cabling information for the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Chapter 4, “Operating the storage subsystem,” on page 93 contains information  
about how to turn the power to the DS5020 storage subsystem on and off, recover  
from an overheated power supply and fan unit, troubleshoot, and interpret LEDs.  
Chapter 5, “Replacing components,” on page 121 contains step-by-step instructions  
about how to install or remove customer replaceable units (CRUs), such as  
Enhanced Disk Drive Modules (E-DDMs), power supply and fan units, RAID  
controllers, battery units, midplane, and Small Form-factor Pluggable transceiver  
(SFP) modules.  
Chapter 6, “Hardware maintenance,” on page 153 describes problems and  
symptoms that are specific to the DS5020 storage subsystem. It also provides a  
parts list for the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Appendix A, “Records,” on page 163 provides a table that you can use to record  
and update important information about your DS5020 storage subsystem, including  
serial number and device records.  
Appendix B, “Rack mounting templates,” on page 167 provides the rack mounting  
templates for installation of the DS5020 storage subsystem. If you want to tear out  
the templates from the document for use during installation, use these copies of the  
templates.  
Appendix D, “Power cords,” on page 179 lists power cord information for the  
DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Appendix E, “Additional DS5020 documentation,” on page 183 lists additional  
DS5020 documents.  
Appendix F, “Accessibility,” on page 195 details accessibility information.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS5020 and DS4000-family storage subsystem installation tasks -  
General overview  
For educational information about the DS5020 and other IBM System Storage  
products, go to http://ibmdsseriestraining.com/.  
Table 1 provides a sequential list of many installation and configuration tasks that  
are common to most DS5020 and DS4000-family configurations. When you install  
and configure your storage subsystem, refer to this table to find the documentation  
that explains how to complete each task.  
Table 1. Where to find DS5020 and DS4000-family installation and configuration procedures  
Installation task  
Where to find information or procedures  
1
Plan the installation  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and Host  
Support Guide  
DS4100 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4200 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4300 Storage Subsystem Installation, User's, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4400 Fibre Channel Storage Server Installation and  
Support Guide  
DS4500 Storage Subsystem Installation, User's, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4700 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4800  
DS4800 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and DS4200, Sections 2, 3, and 4 also for  
installing the EXP810 and EXP420  
v
v
v
v
IBM System Storage DS5000 Quick Start Guide  
DS5000 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage DS5020 Quick Start Guide  
DS5020 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
xx IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Where to find DS5020 and DS4000-family installation and configuration  
procedures (continued)  
Installation task  
Where to find information or procedures  
2
Mount the DS5020  
storage subsystem in  
the rack  
v
v
v
v
DS4800 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4800  
DS4700 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and DS4200, Sections 2, 3, and 4 also for  
installing the EXP810 and EXP420  
v
v
v
DS4400 and DS4500 Rack Mounting Instructions  
DS4300 Rack Mounting Instructions  
DS4200 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
v
v
v
DS4100 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage DS5000 Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage DS5020 Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
3
Mount the storage  
expansion unit in the  
rack  
v
v
v
v
DS4000 EXP100 Storage Expansion Unit Installation, User’s  
and Maintenance Guide  
DS4000 EXP420 Storage Expansion Enclosures Installation,  
User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
DS4000 EXP700 and EXP710 Storage Expansion Enclosures  
Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
DS4000 EXP810 Storage Expansion Enclosures Installation,  
User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
v
v
FAStT EXP500 Installation and User’s Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and DS4200, Sections 2, 3, and 4 also for  
installing the EXP810 and EXP420  
v
v
DS5000 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
DS5020 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
About this document xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 1. Where to find DS5020 and DS4000-family installation and configuration  
procedures (continued)  
Installation task  
Where to find information or procedures  
4
Route the storage  
expansion unit Fibre  
Channel cables  
v
v
v
DS4100 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4200 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4300 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
v
v
DS4400 Fibre Channel Cabling Instructions  
5
Route the host  
server Fibre Channel  
cables  
DS4500 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
v
v
DS4700 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and DS4200, Sections 2, 3, and 4 also for  
installing the EXP810 and EXP420  
v
v
DS4800 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
6
7
Power up the  
subsystem  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4800  
v
v
DS5000 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
DS5020 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Configure DS5020  
network settings  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and Host  
Support Guide  
DS4100 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4200 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4300 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4400 Fibre Channel Storage Server Installation and  
Support Guide  
DS4500 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4700 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and DS4200, Sections 2, 3, and 4 also for  
installing the EXP810 and EXP420  
v
v
DS4800 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide, Quick reference for  
the DS4800  
DS5000 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
DS5020 Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
xxii IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 1. Where to find DS5020 and DS4000-family installation and configuration  
procedures (continued)  
Installation task  
Where to find information or procedures  
8
Zone the fabric  
switch (SAN-attached  
only)  
v
v
DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and Host  
Support Guide  
DS4000 Storage Manager Copy Services Guide (describes  
switch zoning for the Remote Mirror Option)  
v See also the documentation provided by the switch  
manufacturer.  
9
Install DS Storage  
Manager software on  
the management  
station  
v
DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and Host  
Support Guide  
v DS Storage Manager online help (for post-installation tasks)  
10 Install host software  
(failover drivers) on  
host server  
11 Start DS Storage  
Manager  
12 Set the DS Storage  
Manager clock  
13 Set the DS Storage  
Manager host default  
type  
14 Verify DS5020  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
DS4100 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
subsystem health  
DS4200 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4300 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4400 Fibre Channel Storage Server Installation and  
Support Guide  
DS4500 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4700 Express Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
DS4800 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
IBM System Storage DS5020 Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
15 Enable DS Storage  
Manager premium  
feature keys  
Copy Services premium features  
DS4000 Storage Manager Copy Services Guide  
FC/SATA Intermix premium feature  
v
DS4000 Fibre Channel and Serial ATA Intermix  
Premium Feature Installation Overview  
v
FDE Best Practices Guide  
Storage Partitioning (and general premium features  
information)  
DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and Host  
Support Guide  
About this document xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 1. Where to find DS5020 and DS4000-family installation and configuration  
procedures (continued)  
Installation task  
Where to find information or procedures  
16 Configure arrays and  
v
DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and Host  
Support Guide  
logical drives  
17 Configure host  
v DS Storage Manager online help  
partitions  
18 Verify host access to  
DS5020 storage  
19 Add storage capacity IBM System Storage Migration Guide  
or configure  
migration of drives  
Getting information, help, and service  
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information  
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to  
assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional  
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem  
with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary.  
Before you call  
Before you call, take these steps to try to solve the problem yourself:  
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.  
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system is turned on.  
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the  
diagnostic tools that come with your system.  
v Check for technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers at the IBM  
support Web site pages that are listed in this section.  
v Use an IBM discussion forum on the IBM Web site to ask questions.  
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the  
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the DS Storage Manager online  
help or in the documents that are provided with your system and software. The  
information that comes with your system also describes the diagnostic tests that  
you can perform. Most subsystems, operating systems, and programs come with  
information that contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error  
messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the information  
for the operating system or program.  
Using the documentation  
Information about your IBM system and preinstalled software, if any, is available in  
the documents that come with your system. This includes printed books, online  
documents, readme files, and help files. See the troubleshooting information in your  
system documentation for instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The  
troubleshooting information or the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need  
additional or updated device drivers or other software.  
Finding DS5020 and DS4000-family readme files  
1. Go to the following Web site:  
www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk/  
xxiv IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Click the link for your storage subsystem (for example, DS5020).  
3. When the subsystem support page opens, click the Download tab.  
4. Under the Download tab, click Storage Manager, firmware, HBA, tools,  
support & pubs (including readmes).  
5. Click the applicable tab for the type of readme file that you are looking for:  
v Firmware  
v Storage Mgr  
v HBA  
v Tools  
A table displays as you click each tab.  
6. In the table, click on the applicable link in the Current version and readmes  
column.  
7. Click the link for the readme file.  
Web sites  
The most current information about DS5020 storage subsystems and DS Storage  
Manager, including documentation and the most recent software, firmware, and  
NVSRAM downloads, can be found at the following Web sites.  
DS4000 and DS5000 Midrange Disk Systems  
Find the latest information about IBM System Storage disk storage systems,  
including all of the DS4000 and DS5000 storage subsystems:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
IBM System Storage products  
Find information about all IBM System Storage products:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage  
Support for IBM System Storage disk storage systems  
Find links to support pages for all IBM System Storage disk storage  
systems, including DS4000 and DS5000 storage subsystems and  
expansion units:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk/  
System Storage DS4000 and DS5000 interoperability matrix  
Find the latest information about operating system and HBA support,  
clustering support, storage area network (SAN) fabric support, and DS  
Storage Manager feature support:  
http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/disk/ds4000/interop-matrix.html  
Storage Area Network (SAN) support  
Find information about using SAN switches, including links to user guides  
and other documents:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/san  
DS4000 and DS5000 technical support  
Find downloads, hints and tips, documentation, parts information, HBA and  
Fibre Channel support:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk/  
Select your storage subsystem (for example, DS5020).  
About this document xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Premium feature activation  
Activate a DS5020 or DS4000 premium feature by using the online tool:  
http://www-912.ibm.com/PremiumFeatures/jsp/keyInput.jsp  
IBM publications center  
Find IBM publications:  
http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/  
Support for System p® servers  
Find the latest information supporting System p AIX® and Linux® servers:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/  
brandmain?brandind=5000025  
Support for System x® servers  
Find the latest information supporting System x Intel®- and AMD-based  
servers:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/  
brandmain?brandind=5000008  
Fix delivery center for AIX and Linux on POWER®  
Find the latest AIX and Linux on POWER information and downloads:  
http://www-912.ibm.com/eserver/support/fixes/fcgui.jsp  
In the Product family drop-down menu, select UNIX® servers. Then select  
your product and fix type from the subsequent drop-down menus.  
System p and AIX information center  
Find everything you need to know about using AIX with System p and  
POWER servers:  
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/pseries/index.jsp?  
Software service and support  
Through the IBM Support Line, for a fee you can get telephone assistance with  
usage, configuration, and software problems. For information about which products  
are supported by Support Line in your country or region, go to the following Web  
site:  
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products  
For more information about the IBM Support Line and other IBM services, go to the  
following Web sites:  
v http://www.ibm.com/services/  
v http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/  
Hardware service and support  
You can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services or  
through your IBM reseller, if your reseller is authorized by IBM to provide warranty  
service. Go to the following Web site for support telephone numbers:  
http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/  
In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,  
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,  
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.  
xxvi IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fire suppression systems  
A fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer’s own  
insurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both,  
should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correct  
level of coverage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment to  
internal and external standards that require certain environments for reliable  
operation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with fire  
suppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nor does  
IBM provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.  
About this document xxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xxviii IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
This chapter describes the operating specifications, features, and components for  
the IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem (hereafter referred to as  
DS5020 or storage subsystem).  
This chapter also includes an inventory checklist and important information about  
best practices guidelines and product updates for your DS5020.  
Overview  
The IBM System Storage DS5020 storage subsystem (Machine Type 1814-20A) is  
designed to provide solutions to meet the needs of midrange/departmental storage  
requirements, delivering high performance, advanced function, high availability,  
modular and scalable storage capacity, with SAN-attached 8 Gbps Fibre Channel  
(FC) and 1 Gbps iSCSI connectivity, and support for RAID levels 0, 1, 3, 5, and 6  
up to over 49 terabytes (TB) when using 450 GB Fibre Channel hard drives and up  
to 112 TB when using 1 TB Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA)  
Enhanced Disk Drive Modules (E-DDMs).  
A 3U rack-mountable enclosure houses the DS5020 redundant, dual-active RAID  
controllers with either four Fibre Channel ports, four Fibre Channel ports, or two  
Fibre Channel and two iSCSI ports per controller. The DS5020 can be configured  
for the attachment of host servers and EXP520 and EXP810 storage expansion  
enclosures and up to 16 4 Gbps Fibre Channel or SATA E-DDMs. The base  
DS5020 storage subsystem controllers each have four Fibre Channel ports.  
The DS5020 supports the attachment of up to six EXP520 and EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures, resulting in the capability to connect up to 112 E-DDMs and  
enabling storage configurations of over 49 TB using 450 GB Fibre Channel E-DDMs  
or 112 TB using 1 TB SATA E-DDMs.  
The base DS5020 storage subsystem supports up to 32 drives, which includes 16  
drives in the DS5020 chassis and 16 more drives in an attached storage expansion  
enclosure. To attach more than 32 drives, you much purchase the applicable  
feature option.  
To attach additional drives to the DS5020, you can use EXP520 or EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures. You can connect EXP520 storage expansion enclosures to  
the DS5020 without purchasing feature options. To attach an EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosure or enclosures to the DS5020, you must purchase the Attach  
EXP810 to DS5020 Activation feature option. Contact your IBM marketing  
representative or IBM reseller for more information.  
To connect 33 - 64 drives in one DS5020 and three EXP520 storage expansion  
enclosures, you must purchase the DS5020 Drive Attach 33 - 64 feature option. If  
you need to connect 65 - 112 drives in a DS5020 configuration, you must purchase  
the DS5020 Drive Attach 65- 112 feature option in addition to the DS5020 Drive  
Attach 33 - 64 feature option. These two feature options enable you to attach the  
additional drives in one DS5020 and six EXP520 storage expansion enclosures.  
Contact your IBM marketing representative or IBM reseller for more information.  
The DS5020 supports configurations of FC disks with or without Full Disk  
Encryption (FDE), or SATA disks, or a mix of disk drives. To install FDE disks in a  
DS5020, you must purchase the Full Disk Encryption option. Advanced DS5020  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
storage management, copy service options, and optional advanced disaster  
recovery functions are available for the DS5020, including FlashCopy®,  
VolumeCopy, and Enhanced Remote Mirroring.  
The DS5020 supports up to four hosts in a redundant direct-attached Fibre Channel  
configuration. When using Fibre Channel or Ethernet switches, you can redundantly  
connect up to 512 hosts to the DS5020 FC and iSCSI host ports. You can order up  
to 128 storage partitions for the DS5020.  
The DS5020 storage subsystem has ac power and fan units.  
The DS Storage Manager client is also available for the DS5020. This storage  
management software is designed to help centralize storage management, help  
simplify partitioning of the DS5020 storage subsystem, and strategically allocate  
storage capacity to maximize storage space.  
Base DS5020 features  
The base DS5020 storage subsystem is a 3U rack-mount enclosure with the  
following features.  
Note: Depending on the configuration options that were purchased with your  
DS5020, your hardware features might differ slightly from those in this list.  
v Dual RAID controllers, one of the configurations in the following list:  
– Controllers with 1 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, and two  
standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
– Controllers with 1 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one  
optional 2-port 8 Gbps FC host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive  
channel ports  
– Controllers with 1 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one  
optional 2-port 1 GB iSCSI host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive  
channel ports  
– Controllers with 2 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, and two  
standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
– Controllers with 2 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one  
optional 2-port 8 Gbps FC host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive  
channel ports  
– Controllers with 2 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one  
optional 2-port 1 GB iSCSI host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive  
channel ports  
v Four or eight 8 Gbps FC Small Form-factor Pluggable transceivers (SFPs)  
Note: These SFPs will be included only if the DS5020 controllers purchased  
have the four additional Fibre Channel host ports  
v Four 4 Gbps FC Small Form-factor Pluggable transceivers (SFPs)  
v Dual AC power and fan units  
v Two PDU power cords  
v Rack-mounting kit  
v Version 7.60 firmware (preinstalled on the controller)  
v IBM Documentation CD  
v Access to educational information about the DS5020 at http://  
ibmdsseriestraining.com/.  
2
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contact your IBM sales representative or reseller for more information about the  
various DS5020 and options.  
Operating system support  
For supported operating systems, see the latest DS Storage Manager host software  
readme file and the IBM DS4000 and DS5000 series products interoperability matrix  
at the following Web site for additional host operating system support:  
http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/disk/ds4000/interop-matrix.html  
See “Finding DS5020 and DS4000-family readme files” on page xxiv to learn how  
to access the DS5020 readme files on the Web.  
Fibre Channel defined  
Fibre Channel technology is outlined in the SCSI-3 Fibre Channel Protocol  
(SCSI-FCP) standard. Fibre Channel is a high-speed data transport technology that  
is used for mass storage and networking.  
Using a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop (FC-AL), more than 100 Fibre Channel  
devices can be supported, compared to 15 small computer system interface (SCSI)  
devices. The Fibre Channel connection speed from the storage subsystem to  
storage expansion enclosures is 4 Gbps, and enables data transfer rates up to 400  
Mbps half-duplex and 800 Mbps full-duplex on optical interfaces.  
SATA defined  
The Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) interface offers increased data  
rate performance over Parallel Advanced Technology Attachment (ATA), while  
maintaining the benefits of ATA. SATA is designed to overcome the performance  
barriers that have been forecasted for current parallel technologies while  
maintaining the cost-efficiency of Parallel ATA. SATA specifications allow for thinner,  
more flexible cables, and lower pin counts. It also enables easier, more flexible  
cable routing management and the use of smaller connectors than is possible with  
the existing Parallel ATA technology.  
The Serial ATA Working Group introduced the first SATA specification, Serial ATA  
1.0, in 2001 (http://www.serialata.org).  
iSCSI defined  
The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is an IP-based standard for  
linking data storage devices over a network and transferring data by carrying SCSI  
commands over IP networks.  
Inventory checklist  
After you unpack the DS5020, verify that you have the following items.  
Note: Depending on your DS5020 order, your shipping box might contain additional  
materials not listed in the following checklist. Review the inventory checklist  
included in the DS5020 shipping box for any additional parts, and use that  
checklist in combination with the following information.  
v Hardware  
– E-DDMs or blank trays (16) (Your storage subsystem might come with up to  
16 E-DDMs.)  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– RAID controllers (2)  
– AC power supply and fan units (2)  
– Fiber-optic cables (2)  
– Battery units (2)  
– Power cables (2 rack jumper line cords)  
– Diagnostic wrap plug/coupler (1)  
– Serial cable adapter (1)  
– Rack-mounting hardware kit (1), including:  
- Rails (2) (right and left assembly)  
- M5 black hex-head slotted screws (12)  
- M4 screws (4)  
- Washers (8)  
– 8 Gbps SFPs (4 or 8)  
Note: The number of 8 Gbps SFPs depends on the storage subsystem  
configuration. The SFPs are preinstalled in the DS5020 ports.  
– 4 Gbps SFPs (4)  
Note: The SFPs are for the drive channel ports only, and are preinstalled in  
the DS5020 drive channel ports.  
Attention: The DS5020 does not ship with region-specific ac power cords. You  
must obtain the IBM-approved power cords for your region. See Appendix D,  
“Power cords,” on page 179 for the IBM-approved power cords for your region.  
v Software and documentation  
– Host software attachment kit  
Depending on the DS5020 configuration that you order, your DS5020 includes  
your choice of host software kits (Windows®, AIX, Linux, Netware, SUN  
Solaris, HP-UX, Linux on POWER, or VMware). The host software kit grants  
you permission to attach host servers using the applicable operating system  
to the DS5020. The kit includes a DS Storage Manager Support DVD that has  
the applicable IBM DS Storage Manager host software. The DVD also  
includes firmware, online help, and publications in Adobe Acrobat Portable  
Document Format (PDF). (For a list of available IBM DS4000 and DS5000  
publications, see Appendix E, “Additional DS5020 documentation,” on page  
183.)  
If you order more than one host software kit, the additional kits might also be  
shipped in the DS5020 shipping box.  
Note: Depending on your DS5020 configuration, you might need to purchase  
the applicable host software kit for your host server operating system.  
Contact your IBM representative or reseller for more information.  
– Activation kit, including a storage partition kit with the number of partitions you  
ordered  
– IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem Installation, User’s, and  
Maintenance Guide  
– IBM System Storage Quick Start Guide for the DS5020  
– IBM Safety Information  
– IBM License Agreement  
– Statement of Limited Warranty  
4
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Box ID labels (used to label the enclosure IDs on the front of the DS5020)  
Note: If you ordered additional premium features or entitlements, the premium  
features activation or entitlement kits might also be shipped inside the  
box.  
If an item is missing or damaged, contact your IBM reseller or your IBM marketing  
representative.  
A rack mounting template and instructions for installing the support rails and the  
storage subsystem are provided in “Installing the support rails” on page 32.  
To connect your DS5020 to other devices, use the following options:  
v IBM SFP module (preinstalled)  
v IBM LC-LC Fibre Channel cable  
Note: You must order these options separately.  
Product updates and support notifications  
Be sure to download the latest versions of the DS Storage Manager host software,  
DS5020 storage subsystem controller firmware, storage expansion enclosure ESM  
firmware, and drive firmware at the time of the initial installation and when product  
updates become available.  
Important: Keep your system up to date with the latest firmware and other product  
updates by subscribing to receive support notifications.  
For more information about support notifications or the My Support feature,  
including instructions on how to register, see the following IBM Support Web page:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/subscribe/moreinfo.html  
You can also check the Stay Informed section of the IBM Disk Support Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/disk/index.html  
Best practices guidelines  
To achieve optimal system operation, always follow these best practices guidelines:  
v Make sure that your system is in an optimal state before you shut it down. Never  
turn the power off if any Needs Attention LED is lit; be sure to resolve any error  
conditions before you shut down the system.  
v Back up the data on your storage drives periodically.  
v To maintain power redundancy, plug the DS5020 right and left power supply and  
fan units into two independent external power circuits through ac power  
distribution units inside a rack cabinet or directly into external receptacles.  
Similarly, make sure that the right and left power supplies of the storage  
expansion enclosures attached to the DS5020 are plugged into the same two  
independent external power circuits as the DS5020. This ensures that the  
DS5020 and all its attached storage expansion enclosures will have power in the  
event that only one power circuit is available. In addition, having all the right or  
all the left power cables plug into the same power circuit enables the devices in  
the configuration to power on simultaneously during an unattended restoration of  
power.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Do not overload the circuits that power your storage subsystem and  
storage expansion enclosures. Use additional pairs of ac power  
distribution units (PDUs) if necessary. Refer to for information about  
storage subsystem power requirements. Contact your IBM service  
representative for additional information if needed.  
v Before any planned system shutdown or after any system additions, removals, or  
modifications (including firmware updates, logical drive creations, storage  
partitioning definitions, hardware changes, and so on), complete the following  
tasks:  
1. Save the storage subsystem profile  
2. Save the storage subsystem configuration  
Make sure that you save the files in a location other than in the logical drives that  
were created for the storage subsystem.  
For more information about how to complete these tasks, check the DS Storage  
Manager online help or the Storage Manager guide for your operating system.  
v During any maintenance or attended power-up procedure, carefully follow the  
power-up sequence listed in “Powering on the storage subsystem” on page 95.  
Check that each component of the subsystem is powered-on in the proper order  
during this entire power-up procedure so the controller will be able to optimally  
access all of your storage subsystems.  
v The storage subsystem supports simultaneous power-up to the system  
components, but always follow the power-up sequence listed in “Powering on the  
storage subsystem” on page 95 during any attended power-up procedure.  
v A storage system in an optimal state recovers automatically from an unexpected  
shutdown and unattended simultaneous restoration of power to system  
components. After power is restored, call IBM support if any of the following  
conditions occur:  
– The storage subsystem logical drives and subsystems are not displayed in the  
DS Storage Manager graphical user interface (GUI).  
– The storage subsystem logical drives and subsystems do not come online.  
– The storage subsystem logical drives and subsystems seem to be degraded.  
Storage subsystem components  
The storage subsystem has the following removable components. These  
components, called customer replaceable units (CRUs), are accessible from the  
front or back of the storage subsystem.  
v Up to sixteen 4 Gbps Fibre Channel or SATA Enhanced Disk Drive Modules  
(E-DDMs)  
v Two RAID controllers  
v Two ac power supply and fan units  
v Two battery units  
v SFP modules  
The hot-swap features enable you to remove and replace 4 Gbps Fibre Channel or  
SATA E-DDMs, power supply and fan units, and controllers without turning off the  
storage subsystem. You can maintain the availability of your system while a  
hot-swap device is removed, installed, or replaced.  
6
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enhanced Disk Drive Modules (E-DDMs)  
The hot-swap drive bays that are accessible from the front of your storage  
subsystem are shown in Figure 1.  
Figure 1. DS5020 hot-swap drive bays  
The DS5020 supports both Fibre Channel (FC) and SATA E-DDMs intermixed in the  
storage subsystem drive chassis. The DS5020 supports up to sixteen 4 Gbps FC or  
3 Gbps SATA E-DDMs.  
SATA E-DDMs have an ATA translator card that converts the Fibre Channel protocol  
interface of the DS5020 drive channel or loop into the hard drive SATA protocol  
interface. It also provides dual paths to the SATA drive for drive CRU path  
redundancy. Each drive, ATA translator card (also referred to as interposer card),  
and carrier assembly are called SATA E-DDM CRUs. The Fibre Channel E-DDMs  
consist of the Fibre Channel and the carrier assembly (drive tray).  
Install E-DDM CRUs in the 16 drive bays on the front of the storage subsystem  
from the leftmost slot (slot 1) to the rightmost slot (slot 16). When an E-DDM is  
installed, the drive and tray slot designation is set automatically. The hardware  
addresses are based on the enclosure ID, which is set by the controller software,  
and on the E-DDM physical location in the storage subsystem.  
The DS5020 storage subsystem drive channel operates at a 4 Gbps Fibre Channel  
interface speed. Make sure that the DS5020 enclosure speed switch is set correctly  
for 4 Gbps Fibre Channel E-DDM CRUs. The DS5020 storage subsystem SATA  
E-DDM CRUs have an ATA translator card that converts E-DDM 3 Gbps SATA drive  
interface protocol to a 4 Gbps Fibre Channel interface protocol. Operate these  
SATA E-DDMs at 4 Gbps Fibre Channel operating speed.  
Note: Even though the DS5020 has a 2 or 4 Gbps Fibre Channel Link Rate switch  
that can be used to set the drive channel speed at 2 Gbps, the link rate  
speed must be set to 4 Gbps. The DS5020 supports only 4 Gbps FC speed  
in the drive channel. See “Verifying the link rate setting” on page 136for  
more information.  
The Link Rate switch on the DS5020 storage subsystem and the storage expansion  
enclosures connected to it must have the same setting.  
There are no serviceable parts in an E-DDM CRU. If it fails, it must be replaced in  
its entirety (E-DDM, ATA translator card, bezel, and tray). The DS5020 drive tray is  
not interchangeable with the drive tray of other DS4000 storage subsystems such  
as DS4100 or DS4300 storage subsystems. The DS5020 E-DDM option CRUs are  
not interchangeable with those of the DS4200 Express and EXP420. When  
replacing an E-DDM CRU, be sure to order and install the correct E-DDM CRU.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using non-supported E-DDM options or FRUs will result in the E-DDM being locked  
out by the DS5020 controller firmware and might also damage the drive connector  
in the enclosure midplane.  
Attention:  
1. After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or  
reseating the E-DDM CRU to allow it to properly spin down. Failure to do so  
might cause undesired events.  
2. Never hot-swap an E-DDM CRU when its associated green Activity LED is  
flashing. Hot-swap an E-DDM CRU only when its associated amber Fault LED  
lights is not flashing or when the E-DDM is inactive and its associated green  
Activity LED lights is not flashing.  
Note: If the E-DDM you want to remove is not in a failed or bypass state, always  
use the Storage Manager client program either to place it in a failed state or  
to place the array that is associated with the E-DDM (or E-DDMs) in an  
offline state before you remove it from the enclosure.  
Controllers  
The DS5020 has two hot-swappable and redundant RAID controllers. The  
controllers are located at the back of the storage subsystem. The left controller is  
labeled controller A, and the right controller is labeled controller B. One controller  
will continue to operate if the other controller fails.  
The controllers contain the storage subsystem control logic, interface ports, and  
LEDs. Depending on the DS5020 configuration you purchased, your controllers are  
one of the following types:  
v Controllers with 1 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, and two  
standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
v Controllers with 1 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one optional  
2-port 8 Gbps FC host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
v Controllers with 1 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one optional  
2-port 1 GB iSCSI host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
v Controllers with 2 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, and two  
standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
v Controllers with 2 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one optional  
2-port 8 Gbps FC host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
v Controllers with 2 GB memory, two standard 8 Gbps FC host ports, one optional  
2-port 1 GB iSCSI host card, and two standard 4 Gbps FC drive channel ports  
Each controller for the DS5020 has Fibre Channel or iSCSI drive ports for  
connecting to the storage expansion enclosures and two Ethernet ports for DS5020  
subsystem management. See Figure 2 on page 10, Figure 3 on page 10, or  
Figure 4 on page 10.  
The iSCSI ports support both IPv4 and IPv6 TCP/IP addresses, CHAP, and iSNS.  
Use either Cat5E or Cat6 Ethernet cable types for iSCSI port connections. A Cat6  
Ethernet cable provides optimal performance.  
Although both controllers (A and B) are identical, they are seated in the DS5020  
chassis in opposite orientations. If the controller cannot fully be inserted in the  
controller bay, flip it 180 degrees and reinsert it. Do not force fit because it might  
cause damage to the controller unit.  
8
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connectors, switch, and enclosure ID  
The controllers support fiber-optic interfaces for both the host channel and drive  
channel ports. The controllers also contain two Ethernet ports for storage  
subsystem management purposes and a serial port that IBM Support uses to  
perform problem recovery and troubleshooting procedures.  
The default IP addresses for the Ethernet ports on controller A are 192.168.128.101  
and 192.168.129.101. The default IP addresses for the Ethernet ports on controller  
B are 192.168.128.102 and 192.168.129.102. The subnet mask for all cases are  
255.255.255.0. See “Setting up IP addresses for DS5020 storage controllers” on  
page 11 for more information.  
The enclosure ID, comprised of two seven-segment numbers, is located on the  
back of each controller next to the controller indicator lights. The two digits that  
comprise the enclosure ID are referred to as x10 and x1 digits. The enclosure ID  
provides a unique identifier for each enclosure in the storage subsystem. The  
storage management software automatically sets the enclosure ID number. You can  
only change the enclosure ID setting through the DS Storage Manager software.  
There are no switches on the DS5020 chassis to manually set the enclosure ID.  
Both controller enclosure ID numbers will be identical under normal operating  
conditions. The default setting of the enclosure ID is a value of 85.  
Storage expansion enclosures in a DS5020 storage subsystem must also have  
unique enclosure IDs. In addition to having unique enclosure IDs for each storage  
expansion enclosure (including the DS5020 storage subsystems with drives  
installed) in the DS5020 storage subsystem configuration, make sure that the single  
digit (x1) of the enclosure ID for every storage expansion enclosure in a redundant  
drive channel/loop pair is unique.  
If you do not set the single-digit value of the enclosure IDs to be unique among  
storage expansion enclosures in a redundant drive channel/loop pair, it will be  
difficult to troubleshoot the source of errors in the drive channels. For example, with  
four enclosures attached to a DS4500 in a redundant drive loop pair, the correct  
enclosure ID settings are x1, x2, x3, and x4 (where x can be any digits that can be  
set). Examples of incorrect settings would be 11, 21, 31, 41; or 12, 22, 32 62.  
These examples are incorrect because the x1 digits are the same in all enclosure  
IDs (either 1 or 2).  
If the enclosure IDs in your subsystem configuration are not currently set to have  
unique single-digit (x1) values for the enclosures in the same redundant drive  
channel/loop pair, make the changes to the enclosure IDs in the next maintenance  
schedule. The EXP520 and EXP810 storage expansion enclosures do not require  
you to reset the power to the configuration to activate new enclosure ID settings.  
Figure 2 on page 10, Figure 3 on page 10, and Figure 4 on page 10 show the three  
different DS5020 controller configurations that are available. Figure 2 on page 10  
shows the base DS5020 storage subsystem, with two Fibre Channel host ports. For  
more information about DS5020 controller options and other components, see the  
“Parts listing” on page 160.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual-ported  
drive channel  
Serial Ethernet  
port ports  
Fibre Channel  
host channels  
Enclosure ID  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Dual-ported  
drive channel  
Ethernet Serial  
ports port  
Enclosure ID  
Fibre Channel  
host channels  
Figure 2. Back view; controllers with two standard Fibre Channel host expansion channels  
Dual-ported  
drive channel  
Serial Ethernet  
port ports  
Fibre Channel  
host channels  
Enclosure ID  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Dual-ported  
drive channel  
Ethernet Serial  
ports port  
Enclosure ID  
Fibre Channel  
host channels  
Figure 3. Back view; controllers with two standard and two optional Fibre Channel host  
expansion channels  
iSCSI  
host  
Dual-ported  
Fibre Channel  
Serial Ethernet  
drive channel  
channels host channels  
port  
ports  
Enclosure ID  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Serial  
port  
Power-fan  
canister  
Controller Dual-ported  
Ethernet  
ports  
Fibre Channel iSCSI  
host channels host  
Enclosure ID  
canister  
drive  
channel  
channels  
Figure 4. Back view; controllers with two standard Fibre Channel host expansion channels  
and two optional iSCSI host expansion channels  
10 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting up IP addresses for DS5020 storage controllers  
After you install DS Storage Manager (as described in the DS Storage Manager  
Installation and Support Guide for your host operating system), complete one of the  
following procedures to set up IP addresses:  
v “Steps for setting up the DHCP/BOOTP server and network”  
v “Steps for assigning static TCP/IP addresses to the DS5020 controllers”  
Steps for setting up the DHCP/BOOTP server and network: To complete this  
procedure, you must have the following components:  
v A DHCP or BOOTP server  
v A network management station (NMS) for Simple Network Management Protocol  
(SNMP) traps  
v A host that is connected to a storage subsystem through a Fibre Channel I/O  
path  
v A management station that is connected by an Ethernet cable to the storage  
subsystem controllers  
Note: You can avoid DHCP/BOOTP server and network tasks either by using the  
default controller IP addresses, or by assigning static IP addresses to the  
controller, as described in the next section.  
Complete the following steps to set up the DHCP/BOOTP server and network:  
1. Get the MAC address from each controller blade.  
2. Complete whichever of the following steps is applicable for your server:  
v On a DHCP server, create a DHCP record for each of the MAC addresses.  
Set the lease duration to the longest time possible.  
v On a BOOTP server, edit the bootptab file to add in the entries that associate  
the MAC address tab with the TCP/IP address.  
3. Connect the DS5020 storage subsystem Ethernet ports to the network.  
4. Turn on the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
The DHCP server automatically assigns new IP addresses to the controller Ethernet  
port.  
Steps for assigning static TCP/IP addresses to the DS5020 controllers: To  
complete this procedure, you must have the following components:  
v A host that is connected to a storage subsystem through a Fibre Channel I/O  
path  
v A management station that is connected by an Ethernet cable to the storage  
subsystem controllers  
For a host that is connected to a storage subsystem through a Fibre Channel I/O  
path: Complete the following steps to assign static TCP/IP addresses to the  
DS5020 storage subsystem controllers by way of the host that has Fibre Channel  
connectivity to the DS5020 Fibre Channel host port.  
Note: You cannot perform in-band management with a host that has iSCSI  
connections to the DS5020 until it is configured. Use an out-of-band  
management connection instead.  
1. Install the DS Storage Manager client software in the host, and make sure that  
the SMagent software is installed and running.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Start the DS Storage Manager client software. The Enterprise Management  
window opens.  
3. Add the DS5020 subsystem to the Enterprise Management domain using the IP  
address of the host that has Fibre Channel connectivity to the DS5020.  
4. In the Enterprise Management window, click on the name of the default storage  
subsystem. The Subsystem Management window opens.  
5. In the Subsystem Management window, right-click the Controller icon and  
select Change > Network Configuration in the drop-down menu. The Change  
Network Configuration window opens.  
6. In the Change Network Configuration window, click on the Controller A and  
Controller B tabs and type the new TCP/IP addresses in their applicable fields.  
Click OK.  
7. Close the Subsystem Management window, wait at least five minutes, then  
delete the default DS5020 storage subsystem entry in the Enterprise  
Management window.  
8. If applicable, change the IP address of the Ethernet port in the management  
station to a value that is on the same TCP/IP subnet as the controller Ethernet  
port IP addresses that you just assigned. Exit DS Storage Manager, then  
restart.  
9. Make Ethernet cabling to the controller management ports. Add a new storage  
subsystem entry in the Enterprise Management window, using the new assigned  
IP addresses.  
For a management station that is connected by an Ethernet cable to the storage  
subsystem controllers: Complete the following steps to assign static TCP/IP  
addresses to the DS5020 storage subsystem controllers, using default TCP/IP  
addresses that are assigned to the DS5020 storage subsystem controllers during  
manufacturing:  
1. Make a direct management connection to the DS5020 storage subsystem, using  
the default TCP/IP addresses:  
v Controller A: 192.168.128.101  
v Controller B: 192.168.128.102  
v Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Note: For a storage subsystem that has two Ethernet ports per controller, such  
as the DS4200, DS4700 and DS4800, use the Ethernet port that is  
labeled #1.  
The default IP addresses of the second Ethernet port are:  
v Controller A: 192.168.129.101  
v Controller B: 192.168.129.102  
v Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
2. Start the DS Storage Manager client software. The Enterprise Management  
window opens.  
3. Add the DS5020 subsystem to the Enterprise Management domain using the  
default IP addresses.  
4. In the Enterprise Management window, click on the name of the default storage  
subsystem. The Subsystem Management window opens.  
5. In the Subsystem Management window, right-click the controller icon and select  
Change > Network Configuration in the pull-down menu. The Change  
Network Configuration window opens.  
12 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. In the Change Network Configuration window, click on the Controller A and  
Controller B tabs and type the new TCP/IP addresses in their applicable fields.  
Click OK.  
7. Close the Subsystem Management window, wait at least five minutes, then  
delete the default DS5020 storage subsystem entry in the Enterprise  
Management window.  
8. If applicable, change the IP address of the Ethernet port in the management  
station to a value that is on the same TCP/IP subnet as the controller Ethernet  
port IP addresses that you just assigned. Exit DS Storage Manager, then  
restart.  
9. Add a new storage subsystem entry in the Enterprise Management window,  
using the new assigned IP addresses.  
Note: To manage storage subsystems through a firewall, configure the firewall to  
open port 2463 to TCP data.  
AC power supply and fan units  
The DS5020 storage subsystem has two removable ac power supply and fan units.  
Each power supply and fan unit contains one power supply and two fans. The four  
fans pull air through the drive from front to back across the drives.  
The fans provide redundant cooling, which means that if one of the fans in either  
fan housing fails, the remaining fans continue to provide sufficient cooling to  
operate the storage subsystem. The power supplies provide power to the internal  
components by converting incoming ac voltage to dc voltage. If one power supply is  
turned off or malfunctions, the other power supply maintains electrical power to the  
storage subsystem. To preserve the optimal airflow, do not remove a failed power  
supply and fan unit CRU from the DS5020 chassis until you are ready to replace it  
with a new CRU.  
Figure 5 shows power supply and fan unit components for the DS5020.  
Notes:  
1. Your DS5020 hardware might differ slightly from the following illustration.  
2. Although both power supply and fan units (left and right) are identical, they are  
seated in the DS5020 chassis in opposite orientations. If the power supply and  
fan unit cannot fully be inserted in the power supply and fan unit bay, flip it 180  
degree and reinsert it.  
Figure 5. Power supply and fan unit components for the DS5020  
Chapter 1. Introduction 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 6 shows a power supply and fan unit and the airflow through the storage  
subsystem.  
Figure 6. Power supply and fan unit and airflow  
Battery units  
Statement 2:  
14 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only an equivalent type battery  
recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a  
lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by the same  
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Each controller also contains a rechargeable battery unit that is used in the event of  
a power failure.  
Figure 7 shows how the battery unit slides into the battery backup slot in controller  
A.  
Latch  
Pull handle  
Controller A  
backup battery unit  
Controller B  
backup battery unit  
Figure 7. Backup battery unit  
The backup battery unit provides power to back up the cache memory of each  
controller onto flash drives in the event of a power failure. Each battery unit  
contains a sealed, rechargeable SMART lithium ion battery. The battery unit  
contains enough charge to back up the cached data in each controller to a flash  
drive in the event of a power failure.  
When the unit is powered on the first time or whenever the battery is replaced, the  
battery chargers will charge the battery to the programmed level. Then, the  
Chapter 1. Introduction 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
controller will start a battery learning cycle to determine whether the battery current  
capacity is sufficient. Data caching starts after the battery is charged to the  
programmed level. During the battery learn cycle, cache will be active if the battery  
is in good condition. If the battery fails the learn cycle, it is marked as failed. The  
battery learning cycle lasts up to three hours. After the first battery learn cycle, the  
controller will perform a learn cycle every 8 weeks to re-calibrate the  
battery-charging level.  
The battery unit is hot-swappable. You can remove the battery unit for servicing and  
then reinsert it while the DS5020 continues to perform I/O operations. However,  
write I/O caching is disabled when the battery is in a failed state or removed from  
the controller chassis. Replace the failed battery as soon as possible to minimize  
the time that the write IO caching is disabled.  
Information about the condition of the battery unit is conveyed by indicator LEDs on  
the front of battery unit. (“Battery unit LEDs” on page 103 identifies the indicator  
LEDs on the battery unit and explains the conditions that each LED indicates.)  
SFP modules  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser statement  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Apparell À Laser de Calsse 1  
IEC 825-11993 CENELEC EN 60 825  
16 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The storage subsystem supports a fiber-optic interface for host and storage  
expansion enclosure connections. You must install a Small Form-factor Pluggable  
(SFP) module in each interface connector on the controller where a fiber-optic cable  
is to be installed. Do not install an SFP in any port that will not have a fiber-optic  
cable attached. Remove any SFP from any port that does not have fiber-optic  
cables attached.  
The DS5020 storage subsystem host ports support 2, 4, and 8 Gbps Fibre Channel  
speeds. The DS5020 storage subsystem drive ports support only 4 Gbps Fibre  
Channel speeds.  
Attention: The maximum operating speed of the Fibre Channel port is determined  
by two factors: the speed of the SFP module that is installed and the speed of the  
Fibre Channel connection. For example, a 4 Gbps SFP that is plugged into a 8  
Gbps-capable port will limit the speed of that port to a maximum of 4 Gbps.  
Conversely, an 8 Gbps SFP that is plugged into a 4 Gbps-capable port will limit the  
speed of the port to a maximum of 4 Gbps. Carefully check the SFP IBM part  
number, option number, and FRU part number to identify its speed. There are no  
physical features that distinguish an 8 Gbps SFP from a 4 Gbps SFP.  
Figure 8 shows an example of SFP module with fiber-optic cable.  
Note: The SFP module and the fiber-optic cable shown are for illustrative purposes  
only. The actual SFP module and the fiber-optic cable shape might look  
different from the figure shown.  
Figure 8. SFP module and fiber-optic cable  
Software and hardware compatibility and upgrades  
The latest DS5020 controller firmware and NVSRAM, the storage expansion  
enclosure drive enclosure ESM firmware, and Fibre Channel and SATA drive CRUs  
firmware must be installed to achieve optimal functionality, manageability, and  
reliability.  
Unless stated otherwise, you can find the latest DS5020 publications, firmware, and  
host software at the IBM System Storage Support Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
Chapter 1. Introduction 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software and firmware support code upgrades  
To enable support for the DS5020, you must make sure that your system software  
and firmware are the correct versions. To find the latest DS Storage Manager  
software, storage subsystem controller firmware, ESM, and NVSRAM firmware,  
check the firmware readme files. See “Finding DS5020 and DS4000-family readme  
files” on page xxiv to learn how to access the readme files on the Web.  
See the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager Installation and Host Support  
Guide for your operating system for instructions that describe how to install the  
DS5020 controller firmware and Storage Manager host software.  
Note: For the latest information about supported servers and operating systems,  
refer to the interoperability matrix at this Web site:  
http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/disk/ds4000/interop-matrix.html  
Determining firmware levels  
There are two different methods to determine the DS5020 storage subsystem and  
firmware versions. Each method uses the DS Storage Manager client that manages  
the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Method One:  
Go to the Subsystem Management window and select View > Storage Subsystem  
Profile. When the Storage Subsystem Profile window opens, select the All tab and  
scroll through the Profile For Storage Subsystem list to locate the following  
information.  
Note: The Profile For Storage Subsystem list contains all the profile information for  
the entire subsystem. Therefore, it might be necessary to scroll through a  
large amount of information to locate the firmware version numbers.  
DS5020 Storage Server  
v NVSRAM version  
v Appware version  
v Bootware version  
Drives  
v Firmware version  
v ATA translator card firmware version (SATA E-DDMs only)  
Note: The ATA translator card firmware and drive firmware are typically  
packaged together as a single drive firmware upgrade file.  
ESM  
v
ESM card firmware version  
Method Two:  
Complete the applicable procedure to obtain the specified firmware version.  
To obtain the controller firmware version:  
Right-click the Controller icon in the Physical View pane of the Subsystem  
Management window and select Properties. The Controller Enclosure  
properties window opens and displays the properties for that controller.  
18 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You must perform this step for each individual controller.  
To obtain the drive firmware (and ATA translator card firmware) version:  
Right-click the Drive icon in the Physical View pane of the Subsystem  
Management window and select Properties. The Drive Properties window  
opens and displays the properties for that drive.  
You must perform this step for each individual drive.  
To obtain the ESM and drive enclosure component firmware versions:  
1. In the Physical View pane of the Subsystem Management window, click  
the Drive Enclosure Component icon, which is the icon furthest to the  
right. The Drive Enclosure Component Information window opens.  
2. Click the ESM icon in the left pane. The ESM information displays in the  
right pane of the Drive Enclosure Component Information window.  
3. Locate the firmware version of each ESM in the drive enclosure.  
Specifications  
This section provides site specifications for the DS5020 storage subsystem. Before  
installing, you must either verify that your planned installation site meets these  
requirements, or prepare the site so that it does meet these requirements.  
Preparations might involve meeting area requirements, environmental requirements,  
and electrical requirements for DS5020 storage subsystem installation, service, and  
operation.  
Area requirements  
The floor space at the installation site must provide enough strength to support the  
weight of the storage subsystem and associated equipment; sufficient space to  
install, operate, and service the storage subsystem; and sufficient ventilation to  
provide a free flow of air to the unit.  
Dimensions  
Figure 9 shows the dimensions of the DS5020, which conforms to the 19-inch rack  
standard.  
44.70 cm (17.60 in.)  
12.95 cm (5.1 in.)  
57.15 cm (22.5 in.)  
48.26 cm (19.00 in.)  
Figure 9. DS5020 dimensions  
Weight  
The total weight of the storage subsystem depends on the number of components  
installed. Table 2 on page 20 lists the maximum, empty, and shipping weights for  
Chapter 1. Introduction 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the storage subsystem in different configurations. Table 3 lists the weight of each  
component.  
Table 2. DS5020 weights  
Weight  
1
Unit  
Maximum  
Empty 2  
Shipping  
DS5020  
40 kg (88 lb)  
16.4 kg (36.1 lb)  
52.2 kg (115.0 lb)  
1
Chassis with all CRUs and 16 drives.  
2
Chassis without CRUs and drives but with front cage frame and midplane.  
Table 3. DS5020 component weights  
Unit  
Weight  
Drive  
0.75 kg (1.65 lb)  
3.60 kg (7.95 lb)  
2.8 kg (6.1 lb)  
Power supply and fan unit  
Controller (including cache battery backup  
unit)  
Battery unit  
0.9 kg (2 lb)  
Shipping dimensions  
Table 4 lists shipping carton dimensions. The height shown includes the height of  
the pallet.  
Table 4. DS5020 shipping carton dimensions  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
45.7 cm (18.0 in.)  
62.6 cm (24.5 in.)  
80.7 cm (31.75 in.)  
Environmental requirements and specifications  
This section describes the environmental requirements and specifications for the  
DS5020 storage subsystem, including temperature and humidity, altitude, airflow  
and heat dissipation, shock and vibration requirements, and acoustic noise levels.  
Temperature and humidity  
Table 5 on page 21 lists the acceptable temperature and humidity ranges for the  
DS5020 storage subsystem when in storage or in transit. Table 6 on page 21 lists  
temperature and humidity ranges for the storage subsystem in typical Information  
Technology (IT) or office environments.  
Note: Substantial deviations from the suggested operating range, in either  
direction, if sustained for extended periods of time, will expose the unit to  
greater risk of failure from external causes.  
Important: The operating environment air temperature must be 22° C (72° F) or  
lower.  
20 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 5. Temperature and humidity requirements for storage subsystem when in storage or in  
transit  
Condition  
Parameter  
Requirement  
Temperature  
Storage range  
-10° - 65° C (14° - 149° F)  
15° C (27° F) per hour  
Maximum rate of change  
Transit range  
-40° C to 65° C (-40° F to  
149° F)  
Maximum rate of change  
Storage range  
20° C (36° F) per hour  
8% to 90%  
Relative humidity (no  
condensation)  
Transit range  
5% to 95%  
Maximum dew point  
Maximum gradient  
26° C (79° F)  
10% per hour  
Table 6. Temperature and humidity requirements for storage subsystem in a typical  
Information Technology (IT) or office environment  
Condition  
Parameter  
Requirement  
Temperature  
Operating range  
Maximum rate of change  
Operating range  
10° - 35° C (50° - 95° F)  
10° C (18° F) per hour  
8% to 80%  
Relative humidity (no  
condensation)  
Altitude  
Table 7 lists the acceptable altitudes for operating, storing, and shipping the  
DS5020.  
Table 7. DS5020 altitude ranges  
Environment  
Altitude  
Operating  
30.5 m (100 ft.) below sea level to 3000 m  
(9842 ft.) above sea level  
Storage  
Transit  
30.5 m (100 ft.) below sea level to 3000 m  
(9842 ft.) above sea level  
30.5 m (100 ft.) below sea level to 12,000 m  
(40,000 ft.) above sea level  
Airflow and heat dissipation  
Figure 10 on page 22 shows the intended airflow for the DS5020. Allow at least 30  
inches in front of the storage subsystem and at least 24 inches behind the storage  
subsystem for service clearance, proper ventilation, and heat dissipation.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 10. DS5020 airflow  
Table 8 lists the KVA, watts, and Btu calculations. These values assume the power  
supplies have a 73 percent efficiency and a power factor of 0.99. These tabulated  
power and heat dissipation values are typical for the storage subsystem. Maximum  
configuration units are typically operated at higher data rates, have larger random  
access memory (RAM) capacities, or have different host interface boards.  
Table 8. DS5020 power and heat dissipation  
Parameter  
KVA  
Watts (ac)  
Btu per hour  
DS5020  
0.496  
447  
1529  
Shock and vibration requirements  
Operational shock and operational vibration requirements are shown in this section.  
Operational Shock: The DS5020 will be able to withstand the following shock.  
Subjecting the equipment to a single shock pulse with the following characteristics  
will simulate this level of shock:  
v Velocity change = 20 inches per second  
v Wave® form = Triangular, 10g @3.75 ms  
Operational Vibration (Random): While in its normal operating position, the  
DS5020 will continue operating when subjected to a random vibration test using the  
criteria shown in Table 9. This test uses the indicated spectral power density for 30  
minutes in each of the three axes.  
Table 9. Random vibration power spectral density  
Hz  
g2/Hz  
5
17  
45  
2.2x10-5  
48  
2.2x10-5  
62  
2.2x10-5  
65  
2.2x10-5  
150  
2.2x10-5  
200  
2.2x10-5  
500  
2.2x10-5  
2.0x10-7-7 2.2x10-5  
Acoustic noise  
Table 10 lists the maximum sound levels emitted by the storage subsystem.  
Table 10. DS5020 sound levels  
Measurement  
Level  
Sound power (normal operation)  
Sound pressure (normal operation)  
6.4 bels  
68 dBA  
22 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
These levels are measured in controlled acoustical environments according to ISO  
7779 and are reported in accordance with ISO 9296. The declared sound power  
levels indicate an upper limit, below which a large portion of machines operate.  
Sound pressure levels in your location might exceed the average 1-meter values  
stated because of room reflections and other nearby noise.  
Electrical requirements  
This section provides information regarding site power and wiring, storage  
subsystem power requirements, and power cord routing instructions.  
Consider the following information when preparing the installation site:  
v Protective ground – Site wiring must include a protective ground connection to  
the ac power source.  
Note: Protective ground is also known as safety ground or chassis ground.  
v Circuit overloading – Power circuits and associated circuit breakers must provide  
sufficient power and overload protection. To prevent possible damage to the unit,  
isolate its power source from large switching loads (such as air conditioning  
motors, elevator motors, and factory loads).  
v Power failures – If a total power failure occurs, the unit automatically performs a  
power-up recovery sequence without operator intervention after power is  
restored.  
Table 11. DS5020 ac power requirements  
Low Range  
90 to 136 VAC  
50 to 60 Hz  
3.53 Aa  
High Range  
198 to 264 VAC  
50 to 60 Hz  
2.08 Ab  
Nominal Voltage  
Frequency (Hertz)  
Idle Current  
Maximum Operating Current 3.71 Aa  
Maximum Surge Current  
5.04 Aa  
2.04 Ab  
2.67 Ab  
a. Typical voltage: 120 V ac, 60 Hz, assumes 72% power-supply efficiency and 0.99 power  
factor  
b. Typical voltage: 240 V ac, 60 Hz, assumes 72% power-supply efficiency and 0.99 power  
factor  
Power and site wiring requirements  
The storage subsystem uses wide-ranging redundant power supplies that  
automatically accommodate voltages to the ac power source. The ac power  
supplies operate within the ranges specified in Table 11. The ac power supplies  
meet standard voltage requirements for both domestic (inside USA) and  
international (outside USA) operation. They use standard industrial wiring with  
line-to-neutral or line-to-line power connections.  
The agency ratings for the DS5020 storage subsystem are 6 amps at 100 VAC and  
2.5 amps at 240 VAC. These are the overall maximum operating currents for the  
DS5020 storage subsystem with ac power supply and fan unit CRUs.  
AC power recovery: After a total ac power failure, after normal power is restored,  
the storage subsystem performs power-up recovery procedures automatically  
without operator intervention.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power cords and receptacles: The storage subsystem ships with two jumper  
cords used to connect to the rack PDU. You must purchase the power cords that  
are appropriate for use in a typical outlet in the destination country. See  
Appendix D, “Power cords,” on page 179 for more information.  
Heat output, airflow, and cooling  
See “Airflow and heat dissipation” on page 21 for heat output, airflow, and cooling  
specifications.  
Note: In general, disk subsystem reliability tends to decrease as the ambient  
temperature of the environment in which it is being used increases. The  
ambient temperature in the immediate area of the disk enclosure unit must  
be kept near 22° C (72° F), or lower, to provide better reliability.  
When racks that contain many storage subsystems are to be installed together, the  
following requirements must be met to for the storage subsystems to be cooled  
adequately:  
v Air enters at the front of the rack and leaves at the back. To prevent the air that  
is leaving the rack from entering the intake of another piece of equipment, you  
must position the racks in alternate rows, back-to-back and front-to-front. This  
arrangement is known as “cold aisle/hot aisle” and is shown in Figure 11 on page  
25.  
v Where racks are in rows, each rack must touch the rack that is next to it to  
reduce the amount of hot air that can flow around from the back of the rack into  
the intakes of the storage expansion enclosures that are in that rack. Use Suite  
Attach Kits to completely seal any gaps that remain between the racks. For  
details about Suite Attach Kits, contact your marketing representative.  
v Where racks are in rows front-to-front or back-to-back, a gap of at least 1220 mm  
(48 in.) must separate the rows across the cold aisle.  
v For proper airflow in each rack, the rack filler plates must be installed in unused  
positions. Also, all the gaps in the front of the racks must be sealed, including the  
gaps between the storage subsystems.  
24 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
back  
front  
T42 racks  
Perforated tiles  
or gratings  
1220 mm cold  
aisle width  
Cold aisle  
T42 racks  
front  
back  
2440 mm between  
center lines of hot  
and cold aisle  
Hot aisle  
back  
front  
T42 racks  
Airflow  
Figure 11. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack configuration  
Chapter 1. Introduction 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
26 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem  
This chapter provides the information that you need to install the storage subsystem  
into a rack cabinet.  
Before you begin the installation, review the safety information in “Safety” on page  
xiii.  
“Installation overview” provides an overview of the entire storage subsystem  
installation process. Read this overview before you begin the installation.  
Installation overview  
Statement 4:  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Attention: A fully configured DS5020 weighs up to 40 kg (88 lb). At least two  
other people should help you lift the DS5020 from the shipping box. If desired, open  
the sides of the shipping box and remove the CRUs from the DS5020 before you lift  
it from the shipping box in order to lighten the storage subsystem. See “Removing  
the CRUs” on page 36.  
The following steps summarize the DS5020 installation process. Each step below is  
detailed in this chapter or next two chapters, Chapter 3, “Cabling the storage  
subsystem,” on page 45 and Chapter 4, “Operating the storage subsystem,” on  
page 93.  
1. Review the preparation guidelines. See “Preparing for installation” on page 29.  
2. Prepare the installation site. See “Preparing the site” on page 31.  
3. Prepare the rack cabinet. See “Preparing the rack cabinet” on page 32.  
4. Fold down and open the sides of the shipping box. Without removing the  
DS5020 from box, you can remove the DS5020 rack mounting rails and  
hardware from the box. The DS5020 rack mounting rails and hardware are  
placed on the bottom of the shipping box (under the DS5020 storage  
subsystem). Install the support rails in the rack cabinet. See “Installing the  
support rails” on page 32.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Before removing the DS5020 from the shipping box, remove the components  
from the DS5020 chassis to lighten the unit. See “Removing the CRUs” on  
page 36.  
6. Record the serial number, machine type and model number, and RAID  
controller MAC addresses for your DS5020 storage subsystem in Appendix A,  
“Records,” on page 163.  
The serial number, machine type, and model number are located on the left  
edge of the front unit as shown in Figure 12.  
Ser i al n u m b er  
Machine type  
Model number  
Figure 12. Example of DS5020 serial number, machine type, and model number location  
The MAC addresses are located near the Ethernet ports on each RAID  
controller.  
7. Install and secure the DS5020 chassis in the rack cabinet. See “Installing the  
DS5020 into a rack on the support rails” on page 40.  
8. If needed, replace the components in the installed DS5020 chassis. See  
“Replacing the components” on page 42.  
9. Install the storage expansion enclosure or enclosures you will cable to the  
DS5020 in the rack cabinet. Follow the instructions in the Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance Guide for your storage expansion enclosure to set up and  
mount the storage expansion enclosures.  
10. Use SFP modules and Fibre Channel cables to cable the DS5020 to the  
DS4000 storage expansion enclosure or enclosures. See “Connecting storage  
expansion enclosures to the DS5020” on page 54.  
11. Perform one of the following cabling tasks to enable management of the  
DS5020 configuration:  
v If you are using out-of-band management, cable the DS5020 Ethernet ports  
to either the management workstation or the host.  
v If you are using in-band management, cable the DS5020 host channels to  
the Fibre Channel host bus adapters (HBAs) in either the hosts or the Fibre  
Channel switch that connects to the host HBAs. See “Connecting hosts to  
the DS5020 using Fibre Channel host ports” on page 82.  
12. Connect the power cables for the DS5020. See “Cabling the ac power supply”  
on page 91.  
Attention:  
Before you turn on the power to the DS5020 storage subsystem, it must be  
populated with at least two E-DDMs.  
If at least two E-DDMs are not installed in the DS5020, an insufficient load to  
the enclosure power supplies might cause them to intermittently appear as  
failed, falsely indicating the power supplies are bad. All of the E-DDMs in the  
DS5020 storage subsystem and the connected storage expansion enclosure or  
enclosures must contain no prior configuration data.  
28 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13. Turn on the power to the attached storage expansion enclosure and the  
DS5020 storage subsystem using the procedure described in “Powering on the  
storage subsystem” on page 95.  
14. Install the DS Storage Manager host software on the management workstation  
(for out-of-band management) or on the host (for in-band management). Refer  
to the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager Version 10 Installation and  
Host Support Guide for the appropriate operating system for instructions on  
how to install the DS Storage Manager host software.  
15. Use the DS Storage Manager host software to verify the configuration.  
16. Review and perform the procedures described in “Performing the DS5020  
Health Check process” on page 93.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Static electricity can damage electronic devices and your system. To  
avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until  
you are ready to install them.  
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge (ESD), observe the following  
precautions:  
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around  
you.  
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.  
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.  
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and possibly damage the  
device.  
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted  
metal part of the system unit for at least two seconds. This drains static electricity  
from the package and from your body.  
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into your system unit  
without setting it down. If it is necessary to set the device down, place it in its  
static-protective package. Do not place the device on your system unit cover or  
on a metal table.  
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather because heating  
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.  
Preparing for installation  
Before installing the DS5020 storage subsystem, create a detailed plan of how this  
unit will be used in your storage configuration. The plan might include determining  
RAID levels, failover requirements, operating systems to be used, and total storage  
capacity requirements.  
The following illustration shows the items that you need to install the DS5020  
storage subsystem in the rack cabinet. If any items are missing or damaged,  
contact your place of purchase.  
Note: The illustration might differ slightly from your DS5020 hardware. The  
host-interface cables, Ethernet cables, Fibre Channel signal cables, and  
iSCSI signal cables are not shown in the following illustration.  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Support rails  
AC power supply  
and fan unit  
Backup  
Controller  
battery unit  
DS5020  
Storage  
subsystem  
M5 x 8 mm  
screws (12)  
M4 x 8 mm  
screws (4)  
Small Form-factor  
Pluggable transceivers (pre-installed)  
Firmware and DS  
Storage Manager DVDs  
AC power cord (2)  
Complete the following steps to prepare the DS5020 storage subsystem for  
installation into a rack cabinet:  
1. Prepare the site to meet all area, environmental, power, and site requirements.  
For more information, see “Specifications” on page 19.  
Statement 4:  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
2. Move the shipping box that contains the DS5020 to the site.  
3. Remove the mounting rails, mounting hardware, and line jumper cords from the  
DS5020 shipping box. Do not remove the DS5020 from the shipping box at this  
time.  
30 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: The mounting rails, mounting hardware, and line jumper cords  
might be packed beneath the DS5020 in the shipping box. To remove these  
items from the shipping box without first removing the DS5020, open the two  
long sides of the shipping box. Then open and fold flat the two short sides of  
the shipping box. This enables you to access the mounting rails, mounting  
hardware, and line jumper cords without first removing the DS5020 from the  
shipping box.  
After you open the DS5020 shipping container and remove the mounting rails,  
mounting hardware, and line jumper cords, check the remaining contents (see  
“Inventory checklist” on page 3) without removing the DS5020 from the shipping  
box. If any items are missing, contact your IBM reseller or representatives  
before proceeding.  
4. Verify that you have the applicable host software kit for your operating system.  
Depending on the DS5020 configuration you order, your DS5020 will ship with  
either the Microsoft® Windows host software attachment kit or with your choice  
of host software kits (Windows, AIX, Linux, Netware, SUN Solaris, HP-UX, Linux  
on POWER, or VMware). The host software kit grants you permission to attach  
host servers using the applicable operating system to the DS5020.  
The kit includes a DS Storage Manager DVD that has the applicable IBM DS  
Storage Manager host software. If you order more than one host software kit,  
the additional kits might also be shipped in the DS5020 shipping box.  
The DVD also includes the DS5020 storage subsystem controller firmware. For  
the latest controller firmware, check the IBM support Web site for IBM System  
Storage products:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
5. Read the applicable readme files that are included in the Storage Manager host  
software or DS5020 controller firmware packages for any updated information  
about hardware, software, or firmware products. See “Finding DS5020 and  
DS4000-family readme files” on page xxiv to learn how to access the DS5020  
and DS4000-family readme files on the Web.  
6. Continue with “Preparing the site.”  
Tools and hardware required  
Gather the tools and equipment you will need for installation. These might include:  
v Region-specific power cords required for the DS5020  
v 5/16 (8 mm) hex nut driver  
v No. 2 Phillips screwdriver  
v Antistatic protection (such as a grounding wrist strap)  
v Fibre Channel (FC) and Ethernet interface cables and cable straps  
v Rack power jumper cords that are shipped with the DS5020  
v SFP modules  
v Rack-mounting hardware that ships with the DS5020  
Preparing the site  
This section lists the floor space requirements and weight information for the  
storage subsystem. For information about interface cables and connections, see  
Chapter 3, “Cabling the storage subsystem,” on page 45.  
Floor space: The floor area at the installation site must provide the following  
conditions:  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Sufficient space to install the storage subsystem  
v Enough stability to support the weight of the fully configured storage subsystem  
and associated systems. See “Weight” on page 19 for weight specifications.  
Make sure that all requirements, such as floor space, air conditioning, and electrical  
service, have been met. Other site preparation activities include the following tasks:  
v To make sure that there is enough room to move around the cabinet and install  
modules, clear space at the installation area.  
v Install uninterruptible power supply (UPS) devices.  
v If applicable, install host servers with Fibre Channel host bus adapters (HBAs),  
Fibre Channel switches, or other devices.  
v Route interface cables from the Fibre Channel HBA ports in the hosts or Fibre  
Channel switches to the installation area.  
v Route main power cords to the installation area.  
Continue with “Preparing the rack cabinet.”  
Preparing the rack cabinet  
Important: Before you install the storage subsystem in a rack cabinet, keep in mind  
the following considerations:  
v Review the documentation that comes with your rack enclosure for safety and  
cabling considerations.  
v Install the storage subsystem in an environment with a temperature of 22° C (72°  
F). See “Environmental requirements and specifications” on page 20 for details.  
v For proper airflow, do not block the air vents; allow for at least 15 cm (6 in.) of air  
space.  
v For optimal rack stability, load the rack starting at the bottom.  
v If you install multiple components in the rack, do not overload the power outlets.  
v Always connect the storage subsystem to a properly grounded outlet.  
v Always connect the IBM-certified rack power distribution units (PDUs) to at least  
two independent power circuits or sources.  
Complete the following steps to prepare the rack cabinet before you install the  
storage subsystem:  
1. Move, unpack, and level the rack at the installation site (if needed).  
2. Remove the external rack panels.  
3. If necessary, stop all I/O activity to the devices in the rack.  
4. If necessary, turn off all drive enclosure and rack power. Disconnect existing  
power, network, and other external cables.  
5. Install any additional interface cables and power cables.  
After you have completed these steps, continue with “Installing the support rails.”  
Installing the support rails  
Important: Duplicate copies of the rack mounting templates are provided in  
Appendix B, “Rack mounting templates,” on page 167. If you want to  
tear out the templates from this document, use the copies in  
Appendix B, “Rack mounting templates,” on page 167.  
32 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the following templates (Figure 13 and Figure 14 on page 34) to identify the  
proper locations for inserting M5 screws when mounting the support rails and  
DS5020 storage subsystem to a rack cabinet. The locations for the M5 screws are  
highlighted in the templates.  
Hold the applicable template up to each side of the rack cabinet at the 3U section  
where you will install the DS5020. U boundaries are shown as horizontal dashed  
lines in the rack mounting templates. The highlighted squares on each side of the  
template mark the positions where you will thread the M5 screws that secure the  
rails and the DS5020 to the front and rear of the cabinet.  
Note: The mounting holes that are shown in the following templates are square.  
The holes in your rack might be round, square, or threaded.  
Figure 13. Front rack mounting template  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3U  
2U  
1U  
0U  
3U  
2U  
1U  
DS5020  
REAR  
Rack Mounting  
Template  
Rail mounting guide  
Rail assembly  
(Rear Left)  
Rail assembly  
(Rear right)  
®
Printed in the U.S.A  
0U  
Figure 14. Rear rack mounting template  
Before installing the DS5020 in a rack cabinet, you must install the rails and  
rack-mounting hardware that come with your storage subsystem. The DS5020  
requires an Electronic Industries Association (EIA) 310-D Type A 19-inch rack  
cabinet. The distance between EIA rails, from the front to the rear of the rack, is  
60.96 cm (24 in.) minimum and 81.28 cm (32 in.) maximum. This rack conforms to  
the EIA standard. Where you place the support rails in the rack depends on where  
you intend to position the storage subsystem.  
Complete the following steps to install the support rails.  
Note: Refer to Figure 15 on page 35 while performing these steps.  
34 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Support rail  
adjustment screws  
Left  
support  
rail  
M5  
screws  
Right  
support  
rail  
Figure 15. Installing the support rails  
1. Make sure that the rack cabinet has already been installed.  
2. Make sure that a stabilizer has been correctly attached to the bottom front of  
the rack to prevent the rack from tipping forward while the DS5020 is being  
installed.  
Refer to the installation and service guide, or equivalent, for the rack as  
required.  
3. Locate the two support rails, eight of the twelve M5 screws, and eight washers  
that are supplied with the DS5020.  
Note: The M5 screws and washers might already be attached to the support  
rails. If so, remove them from the support rails.  
4. The rack-mounted unit is three EIA units high. Decide accordingly where you  
are going to install the support rails.  
Important: Duplicate copies of the rack mounting templates are provided in  
Appendix B, “Rack mounting templates,” on page 167. If you want  
to tear out the templates from this document, use the copies in  
Appendix B, “Rack mounting templates,” on page 167. Use the  
preceding templates (Figure 13 on page 33 and Figure 14 on page  
34) to identify the proper locations for inserting M5 screws when  
mounting the support rails and DS5020 storage subsystem to a  
rack cabinet. The locations for the M5 screws are highlighted in  
the templates.  
Note the following considerations before you choose where to install the rails:  
v If you are installing the DS5020 into an empty rack, install it into the lowest  
available position so that the rack does not become unstable.  
v If you are installing more than one DS5020 in the rack, start at the lowest  
available position, and work upward.  
v If applicable, allow for possible later installation of other units.  
v If necessary, remove the rack power distribution unit before you install the  
support rails.  
v For procedures and more information, refer to the installation and service  
guide, or equivalent, for the rack.  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The lip on the rail lines up with the bottom of the storage subsystem (the 0U  
boundary in Figure 14 on page 34).  
5. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two screws on the left support  
rail that hold the two parts of the rail together. The support rails are marked as  
left or right.  
6. Hold the back of the rail against the inside of the rack-mounting flange. Make  
sure that the rail mounting guide pins are in the correct holes.  
7. Using the 5/16 (8 mm) hex nut driver, securely tighten the two M5 screws.  
Note: Make sure that you use a washer when installing an M5 screw through  
a square hole on the rack-mounting flange.  
8. Extend the rail to the front of the rack until it makes contact with the front  
rack-mounting flange.  
9. Securely tighten the M5 screws.  
Note: Be sure to install the screw labeled install first in Figure 13 on page 33.  
10. Securely tighten the two screws on the left support rail that hold the two parts  
of the rail together.  
11. Repeat step 5 through step 10 for the right support rail.  
Note: Because the mounting holes on the rack are not always the same size  
as the mounting screws, the lip of each of the support rails might not  
line up evenly. Make minor adjustments as needed to make sure that  
the lip of the left and right support rails are lined up evenly on the racks.  
Failure to do so will cause the storage subsystem to fit unevenly in the  
rack.  
12. Continue with “Removing the CRUs.”  
Installing the DS5020  
This section provides instructions on installing the DS5020. The installation process  
includes:  
v “Removing the CRUs”  
v “Installing the DS5020 into a rack on the support rails” on page 40  
v “Replacing the components” on page 42  
Removing the CRUs  
This section describes how to remove the CRUs to minimize the weight of the  
DS5020 before you install it in the rack. However, if you have three or more people  
available to lift and install the DS5020 in a rack, you might not find it necessary to  
remove the CRUs before you install the DS5020. If this is the case, you can skip  
the CRU removal instructions provided in this section. Instead, continue with  
“Installing the DS5020 into a rack on the support rails” on page 40, and then skip  
the CRU replacement instructions provided in “Replacing the components” on page  
42.  
Attention: Remove CRUs from the DS5020 chassis to lessen the weight to make  
it easier to transfer the DS5020 storage subsystem from the shipping box to the  
rack.  
Use the following procedures to remove the CRUs from the DS5020 before  
installation. Use these instructions after you have completed all applicable site,  
rack, and preparations (as listed in “Preparing for installation” on page 29) and  
36 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
installed the support rails (as listed in “Installing the support rails” on page 32).  
Alternately, you can use these instructions to lighten the DS5020 before removing it  
from the shipping box. The shipping box opens to provide access to the storage  
subsystem CRUs.  
The DS5020 comes with a rack-mounting hardware kit for installing it in a rack. It is  
easier to lift the DS5020 and install it in a rack cabinet if you remove all the CRUs  
first. You will need an antistatic wrist strap and a cart or level surface (to hold the  
CRUs). Observe the precautions listed in “Handling static-sensitive devices” on  
page 29.  
In the following procedure, you will remove the following CRUs from the storage  
subsystem before you install it in the rack:  
v Controllers  
v AC power supply and fan units  
v Hot-swap E-DDMs  
You do not need to remove the blank trays.  
Statement 4:  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Attention: The storage subsystem comes with a bezel that is attached to the front  
of the unit. The bezel protects the light pipes that are located above the drive trays.  
Leave the protective bezel in place until you are instructed to remove it.  
Removing a controller  
Complete the following steps to remove a controller:  
1. Squeeze the controller latch and pull the lever open 90° (so that the lever is  
horizontal) to release the controller from the latch. The controller latch is a coral  
colored tab on the lever.  
Note: The lever rotates upward or downward 90°, depending on whether the  
controller you are removing is the right or left controller CRU.  
2. Slowly pull the lever away from the chassis to remove the controller from the  
bay, as shown in Figure 16 on page 38.  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lever  
Figure 16. Removing and replacing a controller  
3. Place the controller on a level surface.  
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the second controller.  
Removing an ac power supply and fan unit  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
CAUTION:  
Disconnect the power cord before removing the power supply and fan unit.  
Complete the following steps to remove a power supply and fan unit:  
1. Squeeze the latch and pull the lever open 90° (so that the lever is horizontal) to  
release the power supply and fan unit from the latch. The latch is a coral  
colored tab on the lever.  
2. Slowly pull the lever away from the chassis to remove the power supply and fan  
unit, as shown in Figure 17 on page 39.  
Note: The lever rotates upward or downward 90°, depending on whether the  
power supply and fan unit you are removing is in the left or right power  
supply and fan unit bay.  
38 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lever  
Latch  
Figure 17. Removing a power supply and fan unit  
3. Place the power supply and fan unit on a level surface.  
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the second power supply and fan unit.  
Removing an E-DDM  
Complete the following steps to remove a hot-swap E-DDM:  
Note: The E-DDM comes installed in a drive tray. Do not attempt to detach the  
E-DDM from the tray.  
1. Use Table 24 on page 166 to record the location and identify your E-DDMs. You  
must record this information to be able to replace the E-DDMs in their original  
order before they were removed.  
2. Release the latch on the E-DDM CRU by pressing on the inside of the bottom  
of the tray handle.  
3. Lift the closed latch to its open position. (The latch is at a 90° angle to the front  
of the E-DDM when open.)  
4. Pull the E-DDM out of the bay, as shown in Figure 18.  
Latch  
Figure 18. Removing an E-DDM CRU  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Place the E-DDM CRU horizontally on a level surface.  
Attention: Do not stack E-DDM CRUs on top of one another. Protect the  
E-DDM CRUs from vibrations or sudden shocks.  
6. Repeat step 1 through step 4 on page 39 for additional E-DDM CRUs.  
Installing the DS5020 into a rack on the support rails  
Complete the following steps to install the DS5020 in the rack cabinet.  
CAUTION:  
Do not install modules or other equipment in the top half of a rack mount  
cabinet while the bottom half is empty. Doing so can cause the cabinet to  
become top-heavy and tip over. Always install hardware in the lowest  
available position in the cabinet.  
Statement 4:  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
1. Put the DS5020 on antistatic protection, and keep it on while you perform all of  
the remaining procedures in this chapter.  
2. Using a No. 2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the four M4 screws from the rails  
(two screws in each rail). If you do not remove these screws, the storage  
subsystem will not fit securely.  
Note: If the screws are shipped in the hardware pack instead of already  
installed in the rails, skip this step and go to step 3.  
3. Place the storage subsystem in the rack.  
Note: If you have removed the CRUs from the DS5020, you can lift the unit  
into the cabinet with the help of one other person. If you have not  
removed the CRUs before the installation, have at least two other people  
available to help you lift the DS5020 into the rack.  
a. Move the storage subsystem to the front of the rack mount cabinet.  
b. With help from another person, place the back of the storage subsystem on  
the support rails, and then slide the unit into the rack as shown in Figure 19  
on page 41.  
40 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front of Rack  
Figure 19. Installing the DS5020  
4. Secure the storage subsystem. Figure 20 shows how to secure the storage  
subsystem to the rack.  
a. Align the front mounting holes on each side of the storage subsystem with  
the mounting holes on the front of the support rails.  
b. Using the M4 screws that you removed in step 2 on page 40, secure the  
sides in the back of the DS5020 to the rack rails.  
c. Secure the front of the DS5020 using the four M5 screws as shown in  
Figure 20.  
M4 screws  
M5 screws  
Figure 20. Securing the DS5020 to the rack cabinet  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Continue with one of the following actions:  
v If you did remove the DS5020 CRUs before installation (as described in  
“Removing the CRUs” on page 36), continue with “Replacing the  
components.”  
v If you did not remove the DS5020 CRUs before installation, continue with  
Chapter 3, “Cabling the storage subsystem,” on page 45.  
Replacing the components  
If you removed components from the DS5020 storage subsystem before you  
installed it into a rack cabinet, use the following procedures to replace the  
components in the DS5020 after it is installed successfully in a rack cabinet.  
Replacing a controller  
Complete the following steps to replace the controller that you removed before the  
installation.  
Attention: After you remove an controller, wait 70 seconds before reseating or  
replacing the controller. Failure to do so might cause undesired events. The left and  
right controllers are seated in the DS5020 chassis in opposite orientations. If you  
cannot fully insert the controller into the controller bay, flip it 180° and reinsert it.  
1. Slide one controller into the empty slot in the storage subsystem. Be sure that  
the lever is pulled straight out as you slide the controller in, as shown in  
Figure 21.  
Notch  
Lever  
Guide pin  
Figure 21. Removing and replacing a controller  
2. As you slide the controller into the empty slot, make sure the guide pins on the  
side of the controller fit into the notches. After the guide pins fit into the notches  
and the controller fits snugly into the bay, push the lever downward or upward  
90°, depending on whether the controller is inserted in the A or B controller bay  
to fully latch it into place. Do not force fit. The controller is designed to prevent it  
from being inserted into the chassis incorrectly.  
Attention: Make sure that the levers lock into place in the storage subsystem  
chassis.  
3. Repeat step 1 and step 2 to replace the second controller.  
42 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing an ac power supply and fan unit  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
CAUTION:  
Disconnect the power cord before replacing the power supply and fan unit.  
Complete the following steps to replace the power supply and fan units that you  
removed before the installation:  
1. Slide one power supply and fan unit into the storage subsystem. Be sure to  
replace the power supply and fan units so that the lever on each power supply  
and fan unit opens toward the interior of the storage subsystem, as shown in  
Figure 22. Do not force fit. The power supply and fan unit is designed to prevent  
it from being inserted into the chassis incorrectly.  
Attention: Be sure that the lever is pulled straight out as you slide the power  
supply and fan unit into the storage subsystem, as shown in Figure 22. The left  
and right power supply and fan units are seated in the DS5020 chassis in  
opposite orientations. If you cannot fully insert the power supply and fan unit  
into the power supply and fan unit bay, flip it 180° and reinsert it.  
Lever  
Latch  
Figure 22. Replacing a power supply and fan unit  
2. As you slide the power supply and fan unit into the empty slot, make sure the  
guide pins on the side of the power supply and fan unit fit into the notches  
Chapter 2. Installing the storage subsystem 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
along the sides of the power supply and fan unit bay. After the guide pins fit into  
the notches and power supply and fan unit fits snugly into the slot, push the  
lever upward or downward 90° depending on whether the power supply fan is  
inserted in the left or right bay to fully latch it into place. Push the front of the  
power supply and fan unit in gently to make sure that it is fully seated.  
3. Repeat step 1 on page 43 and step 2 on page 43 to replace the second power  
supply and fan unit.  
Replacing an E-DDM  
Complete the following steps to replace the hot-swap E-DDMs that you removed  
before the installation.  
Attention: After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or  
reseating the E-DDM CRU to allow the E-DDM to properly spin down. Failure to do  
so might cause undesired events.  
Note: Use Table 24 on page 166 to verify the proper replacement locations of your  
E-DDMs.  
1. Lift up on the handle and gently push the E-DDM CRU into the empty bay until  
the hinge of the tray handle latches beneath the storage subsystem bezel, as  
shown in Figure 23.  
Latch  
Figure 23. Replacing an E-DDM  
2. Push the tray handle down until the latch clicks into place.  
3. Repeat step 1 and step 2 to replace additional E-DDMs.  
44 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem  
After the storage subsystem is installed in its permanent location, you must cable it  
to hosts, drives, and other external devices, depending on your hardware  
configuration.  
This chapter addresses the following cabling and configuration topics:  
v “Enclosure ID settings”  
v “Fibre Channel loop and ID settings” on page 46  
v “Working with SFPs and fiber-optic cables” on page 46  
v “Connecting storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020” on page 54  
v “Connecting hosts to the DS5020 using Fibre Channel host ports” on page 82  
v “Connecting secondary interface cables” on page 78  
v “Configuring the storage subsystem” on page 79  
v “Installing the storage subsystem configuration” on page 91  
v “Cabling the ac power supply” on page 91  
Enclosure ID settings  
The enclosure ID, comprised of two seven-segment numbers, is located on the  
back of each controller next to the indicator lights. It provides a unique identifier for  
each enclosure in the DS5020 storage subsystem configuration.  
The controller automatically sets the enclosure ID number. You can change the  
setting through the storage management software if necessary. Both controller  
enclosure ID numbers are identical under normal operating conditions. Each  
storage expansion enclosure (including the DS5020 storage subsystem) in the  
DS5020 storage subsystem configuration must have a unique storage enclosure ID.  
In addition, the single digits (x1) of the enclosure IDs of all storage expansion  
enclosures and the DS5020 storage subsystem in the redundant drive channel/loop  
pair must be unique.  
Although the allowable ranges for enclosure ID settings are 0-99, do not set the  
enclosure ID to 00 or any number less than 80. The DS5020 enclosure ID is usually  
set to a value of 85 before it is shipped.  
Figure 24 on page 46 shows the enclosure ID areas.  
Note: Your DS5020 hardware might differ slightly from the following illustration.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enclosure ID  
Enclosure ID  
Figure 24. Storage subsystem seven-segment enclosure IDs  
Fibre Channel loop and ID settings  
When you install a hard disk drive in the storage subsystem, the drive tray plugs  
into a printed circuit board called the midplane. The midplane sets the Fibre  
Channel loop ID automatically, based on the enclosure ID switch setting and the  
physical location (bay) of the hard disk drive.  
Working with SFPs and fiber-optic cables  
Each RAID controller has up to four single-ported host channel connections  
(depending on the configuration you ordered) and two dual-ported drive channel  
connections. A Small Form-factor Pluggable transceiver (SFP) connects each host  
channel port and drive channel port to hosts and storage expansion enclosures.  
Note: The SFPs are preinstalled in the DS5020.  
The SFP is inserted into the port, and then a fiber-optic cable is inserted into the  
SFP. The other end of the fiber-optic cable connects to an external device. SFPs  
are laser products.  
46 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Handling fiber-optic cables  
Attention: To avoid damage to your fiber-optic cables, follow these guidelines:  
v For devices on slide rails, leave enough slack in the cables so they do not bend  
to a diameter of less than 76 mm (3 in.), or a radius less than 38 mm (1.5 in.),  
when extended or become pinched when retracted.  
v Do not overtighten the cable straps or bend the cables to a diameter of less than  
76 mm (3 in.), or a radius less than 38 mm (1.5 in.).  
v When storing excess or unused fiber-optic cables, do not bend the cables to a  
diameter of less than 76 mm (3 in.), or a radius less than 38 mm (1.5 in.) or wrap  
them around themselves. See Figure 25 on page 48.  
v Make sure you have a minimum loop diameter of 76 mm (3 in.) and a minimum  
bend radius of 38 mm (1.5 in.) for fiber-optic cables. Loops or bends smaller than  
these minimums might cause damage to your fiber-optic cables. Use loop  
diameters and bend radii that are greater than these minimums.  
v Do not route the cable along a folding cable-management arm.  
v Route the cable away from places where it can be damaged by other devices in  
the rack cabinet.  
v Do not put excess weight on the cable at the connection point. Be sure that the  
cable is well supported.  
v Do not use plastic cable ties in place of the provided cable straps.  
v The supported maximum lengths of OM2 category Fibre Channel cable are:  
– 4 Gbps: 150 m (492 ft.) of 50/125 um fiber, 300 m (984 ft.) of 62.5/125 um  
fiber  
– 8 Gbps: 50 m (164 ft.) of 50/125 um fiber, 150 m (492 ft.) of 62.5/125 um fiber  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.5 inch  
(38 mm)  
radius  
3.0 inch  
(76 mm)  
diameter  
Figure 25. Bending and looping specifications for fiber-optic cables  
Installing SFP modules  
The DS5020 requires SFP modules. SFP modules convert electrical signals to  
optical signals that are required for Fibre Channel transmission to and from RAID  
controllers.  
Note: The SFPs are preinstalled in the DS5020.  
If the SFPs are not preinstalled in your DS5020 hardware, or if you need to replace  
them, use the information in this section to install the SFPs into the ports. After you  
install the SFP modules, you can use fiber-optic cables to connect the DS5020 to  
other Fibre Channel devices.  
Before installing SFP modules and fiber-optic cables, read the following information:  
v Do not mix long-wave SFPs and short-wave SFPs on a single storage  
subsystem. Use only short-wave SFPs. You can use the DS Storage Manager  
client to view the Storage Subsystem Profile to verify that you are not mixing  
long-wave and short-wave SFPs.  
Attention: Do not use long-wave SFPs or GBICs in any of the Fibre Channel  
ports in the DS5020 controllers. (Long-wave SFPs and GBICs are not supported  
for use in the DS5020 or any of the attached storage expansion enclosures.)  
v The SFP module housing has an integral guide key that is designed to prevent  
you from inserting the SFP module improperly.  
v Use minimal pressure when inserting an SFP module into an SFP port. Forcing  
the SFP module into a port could cause damage to the SFP module or to the  
port.  
v You can insert or remove the SFP module while the port is powered on.  
v Do not install an SFP in any port that will not have a fiber-optic cable attached.  
Remove any SFP from any port that does not have fiber-optic cables attached.  
48 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The operational or redundant loop performance is not affected when you install  
or remove an SFP module.  
v You must insert the SFP module into a port before you connect the fiber-optic  
cable.  
v You must remove the fiber-optic cable from the SFP module before you remove  
the SFP module from the port. Refer to “Removing SFP modules” on page 50 for  
more information.  
v The maximum operating speed of the Fibre Channel port is determined by two  
factors: the speed of the SFP module that is installed and the speed of the Fibre  
Channel connection. For example, a 4 Gbps SFP that is plugged into an 8  
Gbps-capable port will limit the speed of that port to a maximum of 4 Gbps.  
Conversely, an 8 Gbps SFP that is plugged into a 4 Gbps-capable port will limit  
the speed of the port to a maximum of 4 Gbps.  
Attention: Carefully check the SFP IBM part number, option number, and FRU  
part number to identify its speed. There are no physical features that distinguish  
a 4 Gbps SFP from an 8 Gbps SFP.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid  
damage from static electricity. For details about handling static-sensitive devices,  
see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 29.  
To install an SFP module, complete the following steps:  
1. Remove the SFP module from its static-protective package.  
2. Remove the protective cap from the SFP module, as shown in Figure 26 on  
page 50. Save the protective cap for future use.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Plastic tab  
Protective cap  
SFP module  
Figure 26. SFP module and protective cap  
3. Remove the protective cap from the SFP port. Save the protective cap for future  
use.  
4. Insert the SFP module into the host port until it clicks into place. See Figure 27.  
Plastic tab  
Protective cap  
SFP module  
Figure 27. Installing an SFP module into the host port  
5. Connect an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable. For information about the LC-LC cable,  
see “Using LC-LC Fibre Channel cables” on page 51.  
Removing SFP modules  
Complete the following steps to remove the SFP module from the host port:  
Attention: To avoid damage to the cable or to the SFP module, make sure that  
you unplug the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable before you remove the SFP module.  
1. Remove the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable from the SFP module. For more  
information, see “Removing an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable” on page 54.  
2. Unlock the SFP module latch:  
v For SFP modules that contain plastic tabs, unlock the SFP module latch by  
pulling the plastic tab outward 10°, as shown in Figure 28 on page 51.  
50 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Plastic tab  
Protective cap  
10 o  
SFP module  
Figure 28. Unlocking the SFP module latch - plastic variety  
v For SFP modules that contain wire tabs, unlock the SFP module latch by  
pulling the wire latch outward 90°, as shown in Figure 29.  
Wire  
tab  
Protective  
cap  
o
90  
SFP  
module  
Figure 29. Unlocking the SFP module latch - wire variety  
3. With the SFP latch in the unlocked position, extract the SFP module.  
v For SFP modules that contain plastic tabs, slide the SFP module out of the  
port.  
v For SFP modules that contain wire tabs, grasp the wire latch and pull the  
SFP module out of the mini-hub port.  
4. Replace the protective cap on the SFP module.  
5. Place the SFP module into a static-protective package.  
6. Replace the protective cap on the host port.  
Using LC-LC Fibre Channel cables  
The LC-LC Fibre Channel cable is a fiber-optic cable that you use to connect  
DS5020 Fibre Channel ports into one of the following devices:  
v An SFP module installed in a Fibre Channel switch port  
v An SFP module of the host bus adapter port  
v An SFP module installed in an IBM DS5000 or DS4000 storage expansion  
enclosure  
See Figure 30 on page 52 for an illustration of the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable.  
For more information about cabling these devices, see the documentation that  
comes with the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 30. LC-LC Fibre Channel cable  
Connecting an LC-LC cable to an SFP module  
Complete the following steps to connect an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable to an SFP  
module:  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
1. Read the information in “Handling fiber-optic cables” on page 47.  
2. If necessary, remove the protective cap from the SFP module, as shown in  
Figure 26 on page 50. Save the protective cap for future use.  
3. Remove the two protective caps from one end of the LC-LC cable, as shown in  
Figure 31 on page 53. Save the protective caps for future use.  
52 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fibre-optic  
cable  
Protective cap  
Figure 31. Removing fiber-optic cable protective caps  
4. Carefully insert this end of the LC-LC cable into an SFP module that is installed  
in the DS5020. The cable connector is keyed so it will be inserted into the SFP  
module correctly. Holding the connector, push in the cable until it clicks into  
place, as shown in Figure 32.  
Figure 32. Inserting an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable into an SFP module  
5. Remove the two protective caps from the other end of the LC-LC cable. Save  
the protective caps for future use.  
6. Connect this end of the LC-LC cable to one of the following devices:  
v An SFP module that is installed in a separate storage expansion enclosure  
v An SFP module that is installed in a Fibre Channel switch port  
v A Fibre Channel host bus adapter port  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable  
Complete the following steps to remove an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable:  
Attention: To avoid damaging the LC-LC cable or SFP module, make sure that  
you observe the following precautions:  
v Press and hold the lever to release the latches before you remove the cable from  
the SFP module.  
v Make sure that the levers are in the released position when you remove the  
cable.  
v Do not grasp the SFP module plastic tab when you remove the cable.  
1. On the end of the LC-LC cable that connects into the SFP module or host bus  
adapter, press down and hold the lever to release the latches, as shown in  
Figure 33.  
Lever  
Latches  
Figure 33. LC-LC Fibre Channel cable lever and latches  
2. While pressing down the cable lever, carefully pull on the connector to remove  
the cable from the SFP module, as shown in Figure 34.  
Figure 34. Removing the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable  
3. Replace the protective caps on the cable ends.  
4. Replace the protective cap on the SFP module.  
Connecting storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020  
Attention: Before you turn on the power to the DS5020 storage subsystem, it  
must be populated with at least two E-DDMs. If at least two E-DDMs are not  
installed in the DS5020, an insufficient load to the enclosure power supplies might  
cause them to intermittently appear as failed, falsely indicating the power supplies  
are bad. All of the E-DDMs in the DS5020 storage subsystem and the connected  
storage expansion enclosure or enclosures must contain no prior configuration data.  
54 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In the initial installation of the DS5020, you can add only new storage expansion  
enclosures to the DS5020 storage subsystem. This means there must be no  
existing configuration information about the storage expansion enclosures that you  
want to install.  
The DS5020 supports the attachment of up to six EXP520 and EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures, resulting in the capability to connect up to 112 E-DDMs and  
enabling storage configurations of over 49 TB using 450 GB Fibre Channel E-DDMs  
or 112 TB using 1 TB SATA E-DDMs.  
The base DS5020 storage subsystem supports up to 32 drives, which includes 16  
drives in the DS5020 chassis and 16 more drives in an attached storage expansion  
enclosure. To attach more than 32 drives, you much purchase the applicable  
feature option.  
To attach additional drives to the DS5020, you can use EXP520 or EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures. You can connect EXP520 storage expansion enclosures to  
the DS5020 without purchasing feature options. To attach an EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosure or enclosures to the DS5020, you must purchase the Attach  
EXP810 to DS5020 Activation feature option. Contact your IBM marketing  
representative or IBM reseller for more information.  
To connect 33 - 64 drives in one DS5020 and three EXP520 storage expansion  
enclosures, you must purchase the DS5020 Drive Attach 33 - 64 feature option. If  
you need to connect 65 - 112 drives in a DS5020 configuration, you must purchase  
the DS5020 Drive Attach 65- 112 feature option in addition to the DS5020 Drive  
Attach 33 - 64 feature option. These two feature options enable you to attach the  
additional drives in one DS5020 and six EXP520 storage expansion enclosures.  
Contact your IBM marketing representative or IBM reseller for more information.  
If the storage expansion enclosures that you want to install currently contain logical  
drives or configured hot spares, and you want them to be a part of the DS5020  
storage subsystem configuration, refer to the IBM System Storage DS4000 Hard  
Drive and Storage Expansion Enclosure Installation and Migration Guide. Improper  
drive migration might cause loss of configuration and other storage subsystem  
problems. Contact your IBM technical support representative for additional  
information.  
Redundant drive channel pair  
Each controller on the DS5020 has drive channel ports. The storage expansion  
enclosures that are connected to these ports form a drive channel (also referred to  
as drive loop). The maximum number of hard drives that can be installed in one  
drive channel is 112. One drive channel from each controller combines to form a  
redundant drive channel pair.  
Figure 35 on page 56 shows an example of a redundant drive channel pair. If any  
component of the drive channel fails, the RAID controllers can still access the  
storage expansion enclosures in the redundant drive channel pair.  
Note: In the following drive cabling figures, the DS5020 graphics are simplified to  
show only the drive ports of each controller.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Left ESM  
Right ESM  
Right ESM  
Left ESM  
Left ESM  
Right ESM  
Drive  
Drive  
Channel 1, port 2  
Channel 2, port 1  
Redundant  
Drive Channel  
pair  
DS5020  
Drive  
Channel 2, port 2  
Drive  
Channel 1, port 1  
Left ESM  
Right ESM  
Right ESM  
Left ESM  
Left ESM  
Right ESM  
Figure 35. Example of a redundant drive channel pair  
Overview of steps to connect storage expansion enclosures to a  
storage subsystem  
To connect storage expansion enclosures to the storage subsystem, perform the  
following steps:  
Note: The following procedures are for ″cold-case″ procedures (in which the  
DS5020 is powered down when storage expansion enclosures are  
connected, as in the case of initial installation). For ″hot-case″ procedures (in  
which the DS5020 is powered on when storage expansion enclosures are  
connected), refer to the IBM System Storage DS4000 Hard Drive and  
Storage Expansion Enclosure Installation and Migration Guide.  
56 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Follow the instructions in the Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide for  
your DS5000 or DS4000 storage expansion enclosure to set up and mount the  
storage expansion enclosures.  
2. Select a cabling topology appropriate for the number of storage expansion  
enclosures you will connect to the DS5020. If you are connecting external  
storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020, make sure that the storage  
expansion enclosures are populated with at least two drives before you turn on  
the power. In addition, you must have at least two drives in the DS5020 storage  
subsystem before you power it on.  
“DS5020 storage subsystem drive cabling topologies” describes the schemes for  
cabling different numbers of storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020 and  
to each other (if you are connecting more than one storage expansion  
enclosure).  
3. After you select the cabling topology for your configuration, follow the cabling  
diagram for your chosen topology and perform the steps identified in “DS5020  
storage subsystem and supported storage expansion enclosure drive cabling  
schemes” on page 67.  
4. If required, set unique enclosure IDs for all storage expansion enclosures that  
are cabled to the DS5020. See “Storage expansion enclosure ID settings” on  
page 78, and then refer to your storage expansion enclosure installation manual  
for details on setting the enclosure ID.  
The DS5020 storage subsystem locates the drives in the storage expansion  
enclosures after you turn on the power to the configuration. Always connect power  
to the storage expansion enclosures first and then connect power to the DS5020.  
After you have powered on the configuration, use the DS Storage Manager client to  
check the status of the new drives, correct any errors found, and configure the new  
drives.  
Notes:  
1. EXP810 and EXP520 storage expansion enclosures can be intermixed behind a  
DS5020 drive channel.  
2. To cable EXP810 storage expansion enclosures with a DS5020, you must  
purchase the Attach EXP810 to DS5020 Activation feature option.  
DS5020 storage subsystem drive cabling topologies  
This section provides preferred cabling topologies for cabling storage expansion  
enclosures to the DS5020 storage subsystem. The cabling topologies include the  
following:  
v “One DS5020 and one storage expansion enclosure” on page 59  
v “One DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures” on page 60  
v “One DS5020 and three storage expansion enclosures” on page 62  
v “One DS5020 and four storage expansion enclosures” on page 63  
v “One DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures” on page 64  
v “One DS5020 and two or more storage expansion enclosures in a mixed  
configuration” on page 66  
Each example provides redundant paths to the drives. If one of these examples is  
suitable for your hardware and application, complete the cabling connections as  
described by the graphics. If you have hardware other than what is shown in these  
examples to include in your topology, use these examples as a starting point for  
creating your specific topology.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important: The DS5020 supports the connection of a maximum of six storage  
expansion enclosures per redundant drive channel pair. The DS5020  
supports one redundant drive channel pair.  
If you are using fiber-optic cables, install SFP modules into the ports that will  
receive the cables before installing the cables.  
Figure 36 and shows the locations of controllers A and B, the single-ported Fibre  
Channel host channels, Ethernet ports, and dual-ported Fibre Channel drive  
channels at the back of the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Note: Your DS5020 hardware might differ slightly from the following illustration.  
Drive Channel 2 -  
Port 2 on Controller B  
Host Host Host Host  
port 4 port 3 port 2 port 1  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Drive Channel 2 -  
Port 1 on Controller B  
Host Host Host Host  
port 1 port 2 port 3 port 4  
Drive Channel 1 -  
Port 2 on Controller A Port 1 on Controller A  
Drive Channel 1 -  
Figure 36. DS5020 storage subsystem ports and controllers  
Notes:  
1. EXP810 and EXP520 storage expansion enclosures can be intermixed behind a  
DS5020 drive channel.  
2. To cable EXP810 storage expansion enclosures with a DS5020, you must  
purchase the Attach EXP810 to DS5020 Activation feature option.  
58 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and one storage expansion enclosure  
If you are cabling one DS5020 storage subsystem to one storage expansion  
enclosure, Figure 37 shows the correct cabling topology.  
Note: Figure 37 illustrates the drive channel connections between the DS5020 and  
the storage expansion enclosures. Do not use Figure 37 as the cabling  
diagram. Follow the instructions in “DS5020 storage subsystem and  
supported storage expansion enclosure drive cabling schemes” on page 67  
for specific cabling instructions.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 37. Cabling for one DS5020 and one storage expansion enclosure  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures  
If you are cabling one DS5020 storage subsystem and two storage expansion  
enclosures, connect one storage expansion enclosure per controller drive port as  
shown in Figure 38. Figure 39 on page 61 shows that you can also connect two  
expansion enclosures together behind a single controller drive port. Although this is  
technically correct, use the topology as shown in Figure 38.  
As Figure 38 shows, when you connect additional storage expansion enclosures,  
you can connect them by using the additional port of the drive channel.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 38. Cabling for one DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures  
When you connect additional storage expansion enclosures, you can connect them  
by continuing the connection from the existing redundant drive channel pair.  
60 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important: Do not cable the DS5020 storage subsystem and two storage  
expansion enclosures as shown in Figure 39. A storage array with the  
incorrect storage topology might appear to be functional, but incorrect  
cabling can potentially have unpredictable results.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 39. Incorrect cabling of one DS5020 and two storage expansion enclosures  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and three storage expansion enclosures  
If you are cabling one DS5020 storage subsystem and three storage expansion  
enclosures, Figure 40 shows the correct cabling topology.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 40. Cabling for one DS5020 and three storage expansion enclosures  
62 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and four storage expansion enclosures  
If you are cabling one DS5020 storage subsystem and four storage expansion  
enclosures, Figure 41 shows the correct cabling topology.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 41. Cabling for one DS5020 and four storage expansion enclosures  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures  
If you are cabling one DS5020 storage subsystem and up to six storage expansion  
enclosures, Figure 42 shows the correct cabling topology.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A  
1B  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A  
1B  
Figure 42. Cabling for one DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures  
64 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 43 on page 66 shows a cabling topology that is incorrect because all six  
storage expansion enclosures are connected to a single drive port of the  
dual-ported drive channel in each controller.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important: Do not cable the storage subsystem and storage expansion enclosures  
as shown in Figure 43. A storage array with the incorrect storage  
topology might appear to be functional, but incorrect cabling can  
potentially have unpredictable results.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A  
1B  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A  
1B  
Figure 43. Cabling for one DS5020 and up to six storage expansion enclosures  
One DS5020 and two or more storage expansion enclosures in a  
mixed configuration  
A mixed configuration is a configuration in which you have more than one type of  
storage expansion enclosure. Figure 44 on page 67 shows the cabling topology if  
you have three EXP520s and three EXP810s attached to the DS5020. (The  
66 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXP520s are denoted in the graphic as ꢀ1ꢁ while the EXP810s are denoted as  
ꢀ2ꢁ.)  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
EXP520  
EXP520  
EXP520  
EXP810  
EXP810  
EXP810  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
Figure 44. Cabling for one DS5020 and two or more storage expansion enclosures in a  
mixed environment  
DS5020 storage subsystem and supported storage expansion  
enclosure drive cabling schemes  
The DS5020 supports only EXP520 and EXP810 storage expansion enclosures. To  
attach one or more EXP810 storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020 storage  
subsystem, you must purchase the Attach EXP810 to DS5020 Activation feature  
option. Contact your IBM marketing representative for more information about  
purchasing feature options.  
The cabling schemes for the EXP520 and EXP810 storage expansion enclosures  
are the same. This section describes the instructions only for the EXP520; use the  
same diagrams and procedures to cable the DS5020 to one or more EXP810  
storage expansion enclosures.  
The following sections show cabling schemes for supported storage expansion  
enclosures and the DS5020 storage subsystem:  
v “One DS5020 and one EXP520 storage expansion enclosure” on page 70  
v “One DS5020 and two EXP520 storage expansion enclosures” on page 71  
v “One DS5020 and three or more EXP520 storage expansion enclosures” on  
page 72  
DS5020 storage subsystem drive cabling rules  
Refer to these general rules when you complete the cabling steps in the cabling  
schemes described in this section.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Do not connect a combination of more than six EXP520 or EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures to the two ports of a dual-ported drive channel. Failure  
to observe this limitation might result in loss of data availability. In the DS5020  
storage subsystem environment, no more than six EXP520 or EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures can be connected to the two ports of a dual-ported drive  
channel because of the internal drive slots in the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
2. Do not connect more than four EXP520 or EXP810 storage expansion  
enclosures to each port of a dual-ported drive channel.  
3. Add storage expansion enclosures to the storage subsystem drive ports in a  
round-robin fashion. For example, if you have four drive expansion enclosures  
to be cabled to the storage subsystem, instead of cabling all four drive  
expansion enclosures to one drive port of a drive channel, distribute the  
enclosures to all drive ports, which results in one enclosure per drive port of a  
drive channel.  
4. Do not connect more than the maximum number of enclosures per drive  
channel, which is eight for EXP520s and EXP810s.  
5. The DS5020 storage subsystem supports the connection of a maximum of six  
storage expansion enclosures per redundant drive channel loop and supports  
one redundant drive channel loop pair. Failure to observe this limitation might  
result in loss of data availability.  
6. The DS5020 currently supports a maximum of 112 drives in six 16-drive  
storage expansion enclosures per drive channel in each controller. One drive  
channel from each of controllers A and B must be connected to the same set  
of storage expansion enclosures to provide drive channel redundancy. Do not  
connect a combination of more than six storage expansion enclosures to the  
two ports of a single drive channel.  
7. When connecting six storage expansion enclosures to a DS5020, use all ports  
in both drive channels. See Figure 42 on page 64 for the cabling topology.  
8. Connect a maximum of four EXP520s or EXP810s per DS5020 controller drive  
port.  
9. When mixing different types of storage expansion enclosures in the same drive  
channel pair, the link rate Setting must be the same for each storage  
expansion enclosure. IBM does not support different enclosure speed settings  
in the same drive channel.  
10. The controller drive ports of the DS5020 storage subsystem controllers must  
always be connected to ports labeled 1B in both the right and left ESMs of the  
EXP810s in the redundant drive channel/loop pair that is connected to the  
DS5020 storage subsystem. Figure 45 on page 69 shows the location of the  
ports.  
11. To attach EXP810 storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020, you must  
purchase the Attach EXP810 to DS5020 Activation feature option. Contact your  
IBM marketing representative for more information.  
12. To attach 33 - 64 additional drives to the DS5020, you must purchase the  
DS5020 Drive Attach 33 - 64 feature option. To attach 65 - 112 additional  
drives to the DS5020. you must purchase the DS5020 Drive Attach 65- 112  
feature option in addition to the DS5020 Drive Attach 33 - 64 feature option.  
Contact your IBM marketing representative for more information.  
68 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESM  
port 1B  
ESM  
port 1A  
Last EXP810  
storage expansion  
enclosure  
ESM A  
ESM B  
EXP810  
ESM  
port 1A  
ESM  
port 1A  
Other storage  
expansion  
enclosures  
ESM  
port 1B  
ESM  
port 1A  
First EXP810  
ESM A  
storage expansion  
enclosure  
ESM B  
EXP810  
ESM  
port 1B  
Drive channel  
port  
ESM  
port 1A  
DS5020  
Drive channel  
port  
Figure 45. DS5020 drive ports connected to EXP810 ESM ports labeled 1B  
13. The DS5020 supports the intermix of SATA and Fibre Channel E-DDMs within  
the same drive enclosure.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and one EXP520 storage expansion enclosure  
Figure 46 shows the cabling scheme for one DS5020 storage subsystem and one  
EXP520 storage expansion enclosure.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
EXP520  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 46. Cabling for one DS5020 and one EXP520 storage expansion enclosure  
Perform the following steps to create the cabling scheme shown in Figure 46:  
1. Connect either port 2 or port 1 of the dual-ported drive channel 1 in controller A  
on the DS5020 to port 1B on the left ESM of the EXP520.  
2. Connect either port 1 or port 2 of the dual-ported drive channel 2 in controller B  
on the DS5020 to port 1B on the right ESM of the EXP520.  
70 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and two EXP520 storage expansion enclosures  
Figure 47 shows the cabling scheme for one DS5020 storage subsystem and two  
EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind both ports of a dual-ported drive  
channel.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
EXP520 one  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
EXP520 two  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 47. One DS5020 and two EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of  
DS5020 drive ports  
Perform the following steps to create the cabling scheme shown in Figure 47:  
1. Connect port 2 of drive channel 1 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the left ESM in  
the EXP520 one.  
2. Connect port 1B on the right ESM in EXP520 one to port 1 of drive channel 2  
on the DS5020.  
3. Connect port 1 of drive channel 1 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 two.  
4. Connect port 1B on the right ESM in EXP520 two to port 2 of drive channel 2  
on the DS5020.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One DS5020 and three or more EXP520 storage expansion  
enclosures  
To connect three or more storage expansion enclosures to a DS5020 storage  
subsystem, alternately connect a storage expansion enclosure to one of the drive  
ports of the dual-ported drive channel then connect to the other port until all of the  
storage expansion enclosures are attached. Figure 48 shows the cabling scheme  
for one DS5020 storage subsystem and three EXP520 storage expansion  
enclosures behind both ports of a dual-ported drive channel.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
EXP520 one  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
EXP520 two  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
EXP520 three  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 48. One DS5020 and three EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of  
DS5020 drive ports  
Perform the following steps to create the cabling scheme shown in Figure 48:  
1. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 one to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 three.  
2. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in EXP520 three to port 1B on the right ESM  
in EXP520 one.  
3. Connect port 1B on the left ESM in EXP520 one to port 2 of drive channel 1 on  
the DS5020.  
72 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Connect port 1 of drive channel 2 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the right ESM in  
EXP520 three.  
5. Connect port 1B on the left ESM in EXP520 two to port 1 of drive channel 1 on  
the DS5020.  
6. Connect port 1B on the right ESM in EXP520 two to port 2 of drive channel 2  
on the DS5020.  
Figure 49 on page 74 shows the cabling scheme for one DS5020 storage  
subsystem and four EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind both ports of a  
dual-ported drive channel.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
EXP520 one  
EXP520 two  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
EXP520 three  
EXP520 four  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
Figure 49. One DS5020 and four EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind a pair of  
DS5020 drive ports  
Perform the following steps to create the cabling scheme shown in Figure 49:  
1. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 one to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 three.  
2. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in EXP520 three to port 1B on the right ESM  
in EXP520 one.  
3. Connect port 1B on the left ESM in EXP520 one to port 2 of drive channel 1 on  
the DS5020.  
4. Connect port 1 of drive channel 2 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the right ESM in  
EXP520 three.  
74 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 two to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 four.  
6. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in the EXP520 four to port 1B on the right  
ESM in EXP520 two.  
7. Connect port 1B on the left ESM in EXP520 two to port 1 of drive channel 1 on  
the DS5020.  
8. Connect port 2 of drive channel 2 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the right ESM in  
the EXP520 four.  
Figure 50 on page 76 shows the cabling scheme for one DS5020 storage  
subsystem and a maximum of six EXP520 storage expansion enclosures behind  
both ports of a dual-ported drive channel.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port 2, drive channel 1  
Port 1, drive channel 1  
DS5020  
Port 1, drive channel 2  
Port 2, drive channel 2  
EXP520 one  
EXP520 two  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
EXP520 three  
1B 1A  
1A  
1B  
EXP520 four  
EXP520 five  
EXP520 six  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1B 1A  
1A 1B  
1A 1B  
1A  
1B  
Figure 50. One DS5020 and a maximum of six EXP520 storage expansion enclosures  
behind a pair of DS5020 drive ports  
Perform the following steps to create the cabling scheme shown in Figure 50:  
76 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 one to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 three.  
2. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in EXP520 three to port 1B on the right  
ESM in EXP520 one.  
3. Connect port 1B on the left ESM in EXP520 one to port 2 of drive channel 1  
on the DS5020.  
4. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 three to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 five.  
5. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in EXP520 five to port 1B on the right ESM  
in EXP520 three.  
6. Connect port 1 of drive channel 2 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the right ESM  
in the EXP520 five.  
7. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 two to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 four.  
8. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in EXP520 four to port 1B on the right ESM  
in EXP520 two.  
9. Connect port 1B on the left ESM in EXP520 two to port 1 of drive channel 1  
on the DS5020.  
10. Connect port 1A on the left ESM in EXP520 four to port 1B on the left ESM in  
EXP520 six.  
11. Connect port 1A on the right ESM in EXP520 six to port 1B on the right ESM  
in the EXP520 four.  
12. Connect port 2 of drive channel 2 on the DS5020 to port 1B on the right ESM  
in EXP520 six.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage expansion enclosure settings  
This section provides information about storage expansion enclosure settings. For  
additional detail, refer to the Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide for your  
storage expansion enclosure.  
Fibre Channel loop and ID settings  
When you install an E-DDM in the storage expansion enclosure, the E-DDM tray  
plugs into a printed circuit board called the midplane. The midplane sets the Fibre  
Channel loop ID automatically, based on the enclosure ID switch setting and the  
physical location (bay) of the E-DDM.  
Storage expansion enclosure ID settings  
EXP520 and EXP810 storage expansion enclosures do not have enclosure ID  
switches because the controllers automatically set the enclosure ID numbers.  
Each storage expansion enclosure in a DS5020 storage subsystem drive loop must  
have a unique enclosure ID. DS5020 controllers use a combination of the enclosure  
ID and the number of the physical slot that a hard drive occupies to create a unique  
Fibre Channel loop address or arbitrated loop physical address (AL_PA) for each  
drive in a Fibre Channel drive loop. The enclosure ID consists of two digits, a tens  
digit (x10) and ones digit (x1).  
Attention: When connecting storage expansion enclosures, you must use the  
tens digit (x10) enclosure ID setting to distinguish different redundant drive channel  
pairs and use the ones digit (x1) enclosure ID setting to distinguish storage  
expansion enclosures IDs within a redundant drive channel.  
The DS5020 normally ships with an enclosure ID outside the range of 00–77.  
However, if your DS5020 enclosure ID was set to a value within the range of  
00–77, it might be in conflict with the enclosure ID of one of the drive expansion  
enclosures that you are trying to attach to the DS5020. If this is the case, the  
amber ID Conflict LED on the storage expansion enclosure will light after you turn  
on the power to the storage subsystem.  
Give each storage expansion enclosure in a redundant drive channel pair a unique  
ones digit (x1) ID. This setting will enforce hard AL_PAs (unchangeable between  
Fibre Channel Loop Initializations [LIPs]) for the drives and facilitate drive loop  
problem troubleshooting in the event of an error. If the ones digits are not unique,  
two or more devices will have the same hard AL_PA. In such a case, the DS5020  
controller will use soft AL_PAs for the devices that have identical hard AL_PAs.  
The problem with soft AL_PAs addressing is that addresses might change between  
LIPs. This possibility increases the difficulty of troubleshooting drive channel  
problems, since one cannot easily ascertain whether the same device with a  
different address or different device might be causing a problem. Set the enclosure  
IDs in a given drive channel/loop pair to enforce hard AL_PAs addressing.  
Connecting secondary interface cables  
This section is applicable to (direct) out-of-band management configurations only. If  
your configuration uses host-agent (in-band) management, skip this section.  
Use the Ethernet interface ports on the back of the storage subsystem to connect  
the controllers for direct management of the storage subsystems (see “Direct  
(out-of-band) management method” on page 81).  
78 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important:  
1. The serial interface ports are intended to be used by service technicians to  
perform diagnostic operations on the storage subsystem. Incorrect use of the  
serial port can result in loss of data access and, in some cases, in loss of data.  
Do not make connections to the serial port unless you do so under the direct  
supervision and guidance of IBM support personnel. The serial port connection  
requires a special PS2 DIN to DB9 male converter. (IBM Service and support  
personnel, see the Serial cable adapter (RoHS) in “Parts listing” on page 160  
for the FRU P/N.)  
2. To minimize security risks, do not connect the DS5020 in a public LAN or public  
subnet. Use a local private network for the DS5020 and the management  
station Ethernet ports.  
3. For proper EMI shielding, always use quality braided and shielded serial cables.  
Connect a pair of Ethernet cables from the storage-management station to the  
Ethernet ports for controller A (located on the top) and controller B (located on the  
bottom) on the back of the storage subsystem. Figure 51 shows the location of the  
ports on the DS5020 storage subsystem. Only one Ethernet port connection from  
each controller is required to establish a direct (out-of-band) management  
connection to the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Notes:  
1. The alignment of the Ethernet and serial ports on controller A are opposite those  
of controller B. Before inserting an Ethernet or serial cable, verify that the cable  
connection is rotated correctly to match the alignment of the port on the RAID  
controller. Do not force-fit.  
2. Your DS5020 hardware might differ slightly from the following illustration.  
Serial  
port  
Ethernet  
ports  
Ethernet  
ports  
Serial  
port  
Figure 51. Ethernet and serial port locations on DS5020  
Configuring the storage subsystem  
You must configure the storage subsystem configuration after you install the storage  
subsystem in a rack cabinet. Use the information in the following sections to  
configure your storage subsystem configuration.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storage subsystem management methods  
Before you configure the storage subsystem, determine which method of storage  
subsystem management you want to use. You can manage the storage subsystems  
in either of two ways: host-agent (in-band) management or direct (out-of-band)  
management.  
For more information about setting up in-band or out-of-band management  
connections, refer to the DS Storage Manager Installation and Host Support Guide  
for the operating system of the host computer that will be used to manage the  
storage subsystem.  
Important: If the operating system of the host server that the storage subsystem  
logical drives are mapped to is not Microsoft Windows 2000 or Server  
2003, then you have to make a direct (out-of-band) management  
connection to the storage subsystem to set the correct host type first.  
Then, the server will be able to recognize the storage subsystem  
correctly for host-agent (in-band) management.  
Host-agent (in-band) management method  
This method requires host-agent software that you install on the host server. The  
host-agent software allows the DS Storage Manager client program to manage the  
DS5020 storage subsystem using the same Fibre Channel connections between the  
host server and the storage subsystem. You must install at least one management  
station and a software agent host. The management station can be the host or a  
workstation on the Ethernet network. A management station will have the client  
software installed. Figure 52 shows the host-agent (in-band) management method.  
Two storage  
subsystems  
Ethernet  
network  
Ethernet  
network  
4
5
Host  
Management  
Fibre Channel  
server  
station  
Two storage  
subsystems  
Figure 52. Host-agent (in-band) managed storage subsystems  
80 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Direct (out-of-band) management method  
This method uses Ethernet connections from a management station to each  
controller. You must install at least one management station. The management  
station can be the host or a workstation on the Ethernet network. A management  
station will have the client software installed. Attach Ethernet cables to each  
management station (one pair per storage subsystem). You will connect the cables  
to each storage subsystem controller later when you install the storage subsystem.  
Figure 53 on page 82 shows the direct (out-of-band) management method.  
You can either use the default controller Ethernet IP addresses for out-of-band  
connection or change the default controller Ethernet IP addresses by using  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or Storage Manager client. Refer to  
the DS Storage Manager Installation, User's and Maintenance Guide for the  
applicable operating system for more information about setting the management  
connections and installing the DS5020 storage subsystem management software.  
For a listing of default IP addresses, see “Connectors, switch, and enclosure ID” on  
page 9.  
Note: Do not connect the storage subsystem Ethernet ports to a public network or  
public subnet. Create a private network between the storage subsystem and  
the management station.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Two storage  
subsystems  
Host  
server  
Fibre Channel  
Fibre Channel  
Two storage  
subsystems  
Ethernet  
network  
5
Management  
station  
Figure 53. Direct (out-of-band) managed storage subsystems  
Connecting hosts to the DS5020 using Fibre Channel host ports  
The DS5020 supports redundant direct attached connections to up to four hosts. To  
Make sure that you have full protection against the loss of any one Fibre Channel  
path from the host servers to the DS5020 storage subsystem, always use  
redundant host connections by connecting each host to the applicable single-ported  
host channels on both RAID controllers A and B. Using the Fibre Channel switches,  
up to 512 hosts can be redundantly attached to the DS5020 storage subsystem in a  
Fibre Channel SAN fabric.  
To connect a Fibre Channel host adapter to the DS5020 RAID controllers, perform  
the following steps:  
1. Install SFP modules in host ports on RAID controllers A and B.  
Note: The alignment of the single-ported host channels on controller A are  
opposite those of controller B. Before inserting an SFP module into a  
host port, verify that the SFP module is rotated correctly to match the  
alignment of the host port on the RAID controller. Do not force-fit.  
2. Connect the Fibre Channel cables from the SFP modules in the DS5020 RAID  
controller host ports to either the SFP modules in the Fibre Channel switch or  
82 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the SFP modules of the host bus adapters. Figure 54 shows the location on the  
RAID controllers of the DS5020 storage subsystem where the host-system  
cables connect.  
Note: DS5020 controllers with four Fibre Channel host ports is shown in the  
following illustration. The host channel configuration in your DS5020  
hardware might differ slightly from the following illustration.  
Controller A  
Host ports  
Host ports  
Controller B  
Figure 54. Location of host cables on RAID controllers on the DS5020  
3. Repeat steps 1 on page 82 and 2 on page 82 for each additional redundant  
host connection. You can create two redundant host connections for the  
DS5020 storage subsystem, as shown in Figure 55 on page 84, or a maximum  
of four redundant host connections (not shown). With four redundant host  
connections, you can have a connection to a DS5020 Fibre Channel host bus  
adapter or to Fibre Channel switch ports.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host 1, Host Adapter 1 and 2  
Host 2, Host Adapter 1 and 2  
Figure 55. Cabling diagram for two redundant host connections  
For other examples of redundant host configurations, see “Fibre Channel host loop  
configurations” on page 85.  
Fibre Channel and iSCSI connections  
A DS5020 storage subsystem Fibre Channel connection consists of up to four host  
Fibre Channel loops and a redundant drive Fibre Channel loop. The host Fibre  
Channel loops provide the fibre path for host attachment. They can consist of Fibre  
Channel cables, SFPs, host bus adapters, Fibre Channel switches, and RAID  
controllers. The redundant drive Fibre Channel loop provides the fibre path from the  
DS5020 storage subsystem to the hard disk drives (HDDs) in the storage expansion  
enclosures. The redundant drive Fibre Channel loop consists of the DS5020  
storage subsystem, the storage expansion enclosures, Fibre Channel cables, and  
SFPs.  
The DS5020 supports redundant drive channel loop configurations. You can build a  
redundant drive channel loop by connecting one or more storage expansion  
enclosures to the redundant RAID controllers. Then, use dual fiber-optic cables to  
connect one storage expansion enclosure to another in a daisy-chain. For more  
information, see “Connecting storage expansion enclosures to the DS5020” on page  
54.  
The DS5020 storage subsystem also supports 1 Gbps iSCSI connectivity. The host  
iSCSI connections provide an iSCSI path for host attachment. The connections can  
consist of Cat6 Ethernet cables, host bus adapters with iSCSI initiators, or an  
Ethernet adapter with Gigabit Ethernet switches and RAID controllers. See “iSCSI  
configurations” on page 87 for more information about iSCSI configurations.  
84 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fibre Channel host loop configurations  
You must determine how the host systems will connect to the storage subsystem.  
You can connect up to four host systems directly to the storage subsystem through  
Fibre Channel host ports, or you can connect more than four hosts to the Fibre  
Channel storage subsystem through switches. The illustrations in the following  
sections show common host system configurations when you connect to the  
DS5020 Fibre Channel host ports. See “iSCSI configurations” on page 87 for more  
information about host connections through iSCSI.  
Note: The DS5020 supports up to 128 partitions. Configuration upgrades are  
available as upgrade options. Contact your IBM reseller or marketing  
representative for more information.  
Redundant Fibre Channel host loops  
This section provides examples of DS5020 host Fibre Channel configurations.  
DS5020 host Fibre Channel SAN configurations: This section provides the  
following examples of DS5020 host Fibre Channel SAN configurations:  
v Redundant host direct-attached configurations, as shown in Figure 56  
v Single SAN fabric configuration, as shown in Figure 57 on page 86  
v Dual SAN fabric configuration, as shown in Figure 58 on page 86  
v Two storage subsystems in a dual SAN fabric configuration, as shown in  
Figure 59 on page 87  
v Two clusters, as shown in Figure 60 on page 87  
Notes:  
1. These configurations have host and drive path failover protection and provide  
high availability.  
2. The following illustrations do not accurately represent the controller locations or  
port locations in the DS5020. The illustrations are for illustration purposes only.  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
DS5020  
DS5020  
Figure 56. Examples of redundant host direct attached Fibre Channel SAN configurations  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Figure 57, the Fibre Channel switches are connected together via the inter-switch  
link (ISL) to form a single SAN fabric.  
Host system  
Host system  
with two host  
with two host  
adapters  
adapters  
Switch  
Switch  
Interswitch link  
DS5020  
Figure 57. Example of a single SAN fabric configuration  
In Figure 58, the Fibre Channel switches are connected together via the inter-switch  
link (ISL) to form a dual SAN fabric.  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Switch  
Switch  
DS5020  
Figure 58. Example of a dual SAN fabric configuration  
In Figure 59 on page 87, the Fibre Channel switches are not connected together.  
Each switch forms its own SAN fabric.  
86 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Switch  
Switch  
DS5020  
DS5020  
Figure 59. Example of two storage subsystems in a dual SAN environment  
Figure 60 shows an example of a two-cluster configuration.  
Cluster 1  
Cluster 2  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Host system  
with two host  
adapters  
Switch  
Switch  
Switch  
Switch  
DS5020  
Figure 60. Example of a two-cluster configuration  
iSCSI configurations  
The DS5020 storage subsystem supports 1 Gbps iSCSI connectivity. You must  
determine how the host systems will connect to the storage subsystem. The  
illustrations in the following sections show common iSCSI host system  
configurations.  
The iSCSI ports support IPv4 and IPv6 TCP/IP addresses, CHAP, and iSNS. Use  
either Cat5E or Cat6 Ethernet cable types for iSCSI port connections. A Cat6  
Ethernet cable provides optimal performance.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The minimum DS5020 configuration is two partitions. The maximum is 128  
partitions. Configuration upgrades are available as upgrade options. Contact  
your IBM reseller or marketing representative for more information.  
DS5020 host iSCSI configurations  
This section provides the following examples of DS5020 host iSCSI configurations:  
v Single-host, multiple-port configuration, as shown in Figure 61  
v Multiple-host, multiple-port configuration, as shown in Figure 62 on page 89  
v iSCSI and Fibre Channel hosts, multiple-port configuration, as shown in  
Figure 63 on page 89  
v Example of an incorrect configuration: Single-host, iSCSI and Fibre Channel, as  
shown in Figure 64 on page 90  
v Multiple-host, multiple-port, multiple-switch configuration, as shown in Figure 65  
on page 91  
Notes:  
1. The DS5020 does not support direct connections from the host systems to the  
iSCSI ports on the storage subsystem.  
2. The DS5020 does not support connections to both iSCSI and Fibre Channel  
ports from the same host system.  
3. The following illustrations do not accurately represent the controller locations or  
port locations in the DS5020. The illustrations are for illustration purposes only.  
Figure 61 shows an example of a multiple port, single-host configuration. A system  
that uses multiple iSCSI ports can provide enhanced performance compared to a  
single-port iSCSI connection.  
Host system  
with two iSCSI  
connectors  
Gigabit  
Ethernet  
switch  
DS5020  
Figure 61. Example of a single-host, multiple-port configuration  
Figure 62 on page 89 shows a multiple-host, multiple-port configuration. For cluster  
configurations, the following illustration is an example of a multiple-host,  
multiple-port, and redundant path and controller configuration. You can replace the  
two gigabit Ethernet switches in the illustration with one large gigabit Ethernet  
switch that has the required number of ports. Virtual local area network (VLAN) can  
also be used to isolate the two iSCSI networks, instead of a single switch.  
88 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host system  
with two iSCSI  
connectors  
Host system  
with two iSCSI  
connectors  
Gigabit  
Ethernet  
switch  
Ethernet  
switch  
DS5020  
Figure 62. Example of a multiple-host, multiple-port configuration  
Figure 63 shows iSCSI and Fibre Channel hosts in a multiple-port configuration.  
Host 1 with a  
dual-port Fibre  
Channel HBA  
Host 2 with two  
single-port  
iSCSI HBAs  
Fibre  
Channel  
switch  
Gigabit  
Ethernet  
switch  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
DS5020  
Figure 63. Example of iSCSI and Fibre Channel hosts, multiple-port configuration  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 64 shows an incorrect configuration of a single host with both iSCSI and  
Fibre Channel connections.  
Important: Do not cable the storage subsystem and host systems as shown in  
Figure 64. A storage subsystem with the incorrect storage topology  
might appear to be functional, but incorrect cabling can potentially have  
unpredictable results.  
Host with two single-port iSCSI  
HBAs and one dual-port Fibre  
Channel HBA  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
Fibre  
Channel  
switch  
Gigabit  
Ethernet  
switch  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
DS5020  
Figure 64. Example of an incorrect configuration: Single-host, iSCSI and Fibre Channel  
Figure 65 on page 91 shows an example of a multiple-host, multiple-port,  
multiple-switch configuration.  
90 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host 1 with a  
dual-port Fibre  
Channel HBA  
Host 2 with two  
single-port  
iSCSI HBAs  
Fibre  
Channel  
switch  
Fibre  
Channel  
switch  
Gigabit  
Ethernet  
switch  
Gigabit  
Ethernet  
switch  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Fibre  
Channel  
ports  
iSCSI  
ports  
DS5020  
Figure 65. Example of a multiple-host, multiple-port, multiple-switch configuration  
Installing the storage subsystem configuration  
Using the information gathered in the previous sections, install the host systems  
and host adapters.  
Notes:  
1. See the documentation provided with your host adapters for installation  
requirements and procedures.  
2. Use the correct host adapter driver. For the latest supported host adapters and  
drivers, go to the following Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
Attach fiber-optic interface cables to each host adapter. You will connect the other  
end of the cables to the controller later in the installation process. For more  
information about handling fiber-optic cables, see “Handling fiber-optic cables” on  
page 47.  
Cabling the ac power supply  
Complete the following steps to connect the ac power supply cable:  
1. Using the supplied strap, tie the power supply cord to the rail to provide strain  
relief for the power cord.  
2. Connect the power cable to the power supply.  
3. Plug the supplied power cable into a properly grounded electrical outlet. For  
maximum protection against power loss, connect each of the two power  
supplies to a different power source.  
4. Continue with “Powering on the storage subsystem” on page 95 for the initial  
startup of the storage subsystem.  
Chapter 3. Cabling the storage subsystem 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
92 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem  
This chapter describes operating procedures for the DS5020.  
For information about the optimal operation of your system, see “Best practices  
guidelines” on page 5  
Performing the DS5020 Health Check process  
The DS5020 Health Check process is a sequence of suggested actions developed  
by IBM to help users verify and maintain the optimal performance of their DS5020  
storage configurations. The information that you collect in these steps also helps  
provide IBM Service with important information needed for problem troubleshooting  
during IBM Service calls.  
Perform the following Health Check tasks after the initial configuration of your  
DS5020 storage subsystem, and after all configuration sessions. Set a regular  
schedule of periodic Health Check evaluations in order to keep your DS5020 code  
current and to preserve optimal data access and performance.  
1. Monitor the Recovery Guru in the DS Storage Manager client for any obvious  
storage subsystem errors or problem conditions.  
2. Gather and save the following DS5020 storage subsystem event logs for review  
by IBM Service. Gather these event logs periodically for regular Health Check  
monitoring regardless of the state of the Recovery Guru. (You can collect all  
these logs at once and zip them into a single file by clicking Advanced ꢀ  
Troubleshooting ꢀ Collect All Support Data in the DS Storage Manager  
Subsystem Management window.)  
v DS5020 storage subsystem management event log (MEL)  
v Storage Subsystem Profile or DS5020 Profile  
v Read-Link Status (RLS) data  
In addition, collect event logs for the host servers that have mapped logical  
drives from the storage subsystem.  
Attention: Save these event log files to a server disk that will remain  
accessible in the event of a DS5020 storage configuration failure. Do not save  
these event log files only to a LUN in the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
3. Use the Storage Subsystem Profile or DS5020 Profile to verify that the following  
firmware levels are at the latest versions supported for your DS5020 storage  
subsystem:  
v Controller firmware  
v ESM firmware  
v Drive firmware  
If you discover your firmware is not up-to-date, upgrade the firmware and  
software to the latest level applicable to your DS5020 storage configuration. See  
“Web pages” on page 94 for information about where to find the latest firmware  
and software.  
Attention: You must resolve Recovery Guru errors or problems before  
upgrading firmware.  
Save the storage subsystem profile before performing any controller or ESM  
firmware upgrades. Save the storage subsystem profile and all *.cfg files to a  
server disk that will remain accessible in the event of a DS5020 storage  
configuration failure.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: When you upgrade firmware, you must upgrade all client package  
components to the same release level. For example, if you are upgrading  
your controller firmware from version 6.x to version 7.x, you must also  
upgrade your Storage Manager client to version 10.x or higher. If your  
host system uses RDAC, upgrading controller firmware from version 6.x  
to version 7.x might also require host software updates, such as RDAC  
updates and HBA driver updates. Refer to the IBM System Storage Web  
site for detailed instructions.  
4. Use the Storage Subsystem Profile or DS5020 Profile to verify that the following  
functions are enabled:  
v For the DS5020 and all DS4000 models, Media Scan is enabled both at the  
controller level and at the LUN level.  
v For the DS5020 and all DS4000 models, the read/write cache is enabled. In  
addition, use the Storage Subsystem Profile to verify that cache is matched  
between the controllers.  
Web pages  
IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest  
technical information and download device drivers and updates.  
For DS5020 and DS4000 information, go to the following Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
For the latest information about operating system and HBA support, clustering  
support, SAN fabric support, and Storage Manager feature support, see the System  
Storage DS5020 and DS4000 Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site:  
http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/disk/ds4000/interop-matrix.html  
Hardware responsibilities  
In addition to the Health Check steps described above, regular hardware inspection  
and maintenance helps to support the optimal performance of your DS5020 storage  
configuration. Periodically inspect the Fibre Channel components of your DS5020  
storage configuration.  
The following guidelines are suggested:  
v Maintain an up-to-date storage subsystem profile for your DS5020 storage  
configuration. Save the profile to a server disk that will remain accessible in case  
of a DS5020 storage configuration failure. Do not save the profile only to a LUN  
in the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
v Develop a Change Management plan. Include schedules for updating subsystem  
firmware and server host software in the plan.  
Note: Some updates might require storage subsystem downtime.  
v Use IBM-approved Fibre Channel cables for all situations. Note in your  
configuration documentation whether any cables are not IBM-approved.  
v Create and maintain a cabling diagram of the current SAN configuration. Keep  
this diagram updated as you make configuration changes, and keep the cabling  
diagram available for review.  
v Create and maintain a list of other components that are being used within the  
cabling diagram (such as the host system, Fibre Channel switches, and other  
SAN attachments).  
94 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Make sure that all ESMs are properly seated.  
v Make sure that all drives are properly seated.  
v Make sure that all SFP modules are properly seated.  
v Confirm Fibre Channel cable loop size. (Although IBM specifications require at  
least 3-inch cable loops, use 6-inch cable loops or longer.)  
v Make sure that you have proper Fibre Channel cable management.  
v Make sure there is proper air flow and temperature for all components in your  
storage configuration.  
Note: You can find details on many of these inspection and maintenance  
responsibilities in the applicable sections of this document.  
In addition to these inspection and maintenance responsibilities, DS5000 and  
DS4000 training is available for staff who support DS5000 and DS4000 storage  
configurations. Although training is not a part of the Health Check process, DS5000  
and DS4000 training reduces the potential for configuration problems and  
contributes to the overall health of the system.  
Powering on the storage subsystem  
This section contains instructions for turning the storage subsystem on under  
normal and emergency situations. When you turn on and turn off the DS5020, be  
sure to use the startup sequence in this section. If you are turning on the storage  
subsystem after an emergency shutdown or power outage, see “Restoring power  
after an unexpected shutdown” on page 112.  
Turning on the storage subsystem  
The following procedure covers two situations:  
v The entire storage subsystem has been shut down. (The main circuit breakers for  
the cabinet are off.)  
v Some storage expansion enclosures are being powered on while others remain  
online. (The main circuit breakers for the cabinet are on.) You might encounter  
this if you are adding an additional storage expansion enclosure to increase  
storage capacity.  
Attention:  
1. Potential damage to E-DDMs - Repeatedly turning the power off and on  
without waiting for the E-DDMs to spin down can damage them. Always wait  
at least 70 seconds from when you turn off the power until you turn it on  
again.  
2. If you are connecting a power cord to a DS5020 storage subsystem or  
storage expansion enclosure, turn off both of its power switches first. If the  
main circuit breaker is off, be sure both power switches are off on each  
storage expansion enclosure in the cabinet before turning on the main circuit  
breakers.  
1. Are the main circuit breakers turned on?  
v Yes - Turn off both power switches on each enclosure that you intend to  
connect to the power.  
v No - Turn off both power switches on all enclosures in the storage  
subsystem.  
2. Make sure that all power cords are connected. See “Cabling the ac power  
supply” on page 91 for details, depending on the DS5020 configuration you  
purchased.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If the power cords are not connected, turn off both power switches on all  
modules in the configuration before connecting power cords or turning on  
the main circuit breakers.  
3. If the main circuit breakers are turned off, turn them on.  
4. Verify that the link rate setting on the front of the storage expansion enclosure  
matches the speed of the drives in the subsystem.  
Attention: You must turn on power to each attached storage expansion  
enclosure before turning on power to the DS5020 storage subsystem to make  
sure that the controllers recognize all drives in the configuration during the  
startup process.  
5. Turn on both power switches on the back of each storage expansion enclosure  
attached to the storage subsystem. While each storage expansion enclosure  
powers up, the green and amber LEDs on the front and back of the storage  
expansion enclosure turn on and off intermittently. Depending on your  
configuration, it can take several minutes for each storage expansion enclosure  
to power up.  
Check the LEDs on the front and back of all the storage expansion enclosures.  
Verify that no Needs Attention or enclosure ID LEDs light on any of the storage  
expansion enclosures. To verify the Fibre Channel connections between the  
drive expansion enclosures, make sure that no Port Bypass LEDs for  
connections to other storage expansion enclosures are lit. Only the Port Bypass  
LED of the ESM port that connects directly to the storage subsystem drive port  
should be lit.  
Note: The drive activity LEDs will flash slowly (once every 2 seconds) until the  
drive is started by the DS5020 controller.  
6. Turn on both power switches on the back of each controller in the storage  
subsystem.  
Depending on the number of storage expansion enclosures in the configuration,  
the storage subsystem might take several minutes to power up. The battery  
self-test might take an additional 15 minutes. The LEDs will blink intermittently  
until the storage subsystem powers up and completes the battery self-test. The  
green Battery Charging LED will flash slowly (once every 2 seconds) until the  
battery is fully charged.  
Before attempting any operations, wait at least five minutes for the storage  
subsystem to completely power up. A storage subsystem can take up to 10  
minutes to power on and up to 15 more minutes to complete its controller  
battery self-test. During this time, the indicator lights on the front and back of  
the module blink intermittently.  
7. Determine the status of all storage subsystems and components in the  
configuration by completing the following steps:  
a. Check all LEDs on each component in the storage expansion enclosures.  
Make sure that all the LEDs show normal status. For more information about  
LED status for storage expansion enclosures, see “Checking the LEDs” on  
page 101 or the Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide for your  
storage expansion enclosure.  
b. Check all LEDs on each component in the storage subsystem. Make sure  
that all the LEDs show normal status. For information about LED status, see  
“Solving problems” on page 153.  
c. Open the DS Storage Manager Subsystem Management window, and  
display the Physical View for the configuration.  
The status for each component will be either Optimal or Needs Attention.  
96 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d. Review the status of the configuration components shown in the Subsystem  
Management window by selecting the applicable component button for each  
storage subsystem.  
8. Are the LEDs indicating normal operation, and is the status Optimal on all the  
configuration components?  
v Yes — End of procedure.  
v No — Go to step 9.  
9. Diagnose and correct the fault by completing the following steps.  
a. Run the DS Storage Manager Recovery Guru by selecting the Recovery  
Guru toolbar button in the Subsystem Management window.  
b. Complete the recovery procedure.  
If the Recovery Guru directs you to replace a failed component, use the  
individual LEDs on the storage subsystem to locate the specific failed  
component. For troubleshooting procedures, see Chapter 6, “Hardware  
maintenance,” on page 153.  
c. When the recovery procedure is completed, select Recheck in the Recovery  
Guru. This action reruns the Recovery Guru to make sure that the problem  
has been corrected.  
d. If the problem persists, contact your IBM service representative.  
Installing the DS Storage Manager client  
See the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager Installation and Host Support  
Guide for the applicable operating system for instructions on how to install the DS  
Storage Manager software. Use that document and the online help to configure the  
logical drives, partitions, and so on for the RAID controllers. Use your operating  
system documentation to make the new logical drives accessible to the operating  
system. Do not proceed with the configuration setup until you have completed the  
DS Storage Manager installation.  
Assemble any additional items in preparation for software installation. These items  
might include the following:  
v HBA drivers  
v Controller firmware version listed at the IBM System Storage Support Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
v IP addresses for RAID controllers (for in-band management only)  
v Additional documentation for switches and HBAs, if needed  
v Applicable host kit for your operating system, which includes the DS Storage  
Manager DVD containing the applicable Storage Manager version and storage  
subsystem controller firmware.  
Depending on the DS5020 configuration you purchased, your DS5020 will ship  
with either the Microsoft Windows host software attachment kit or with your  
choice of host software kits (Windows, AIX, Linux, Netware, SUN Solaris, HP-UX,  
Linux on POWER, or VMware). The host software kit grants you permission to  
attach host servers using the applicable operating system to the DS5020. The kit  
includes a DS Storage Manager Support DVD that has the applicable IBM DS  
Storage Manager host software. The DVD also includes correct controller  
firmware version.  
For the latest controller firmware and the DS Storage Manager host software for  
your operating systems, check the IBM support web site IBM System Storage  
products.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
Before any planned system shutdown or after any system additions, removals, or  
modifications (including firmware updates, logical drive creations, storage  
partitioning definitions, hardware changes, and so on), save the storage subsystem  
profile as explained in the DS Storage Manager guide for your operating system.  
Save the profile in a location other than the logical drives created for the DS5020.  
Always refer to the readme that is included with the DS5020 storage subsystem  
firmware package (whether the firmware is accessed by the Web or DVD) for any  
special requirements or restrictions that apply to that particular firmware version.  
See “Finding DS5020 and DS4000-family readme files” on page xxiv to learn how  
to access the readme files on the Web.  
Note: Make sure that you install the DS Storage Manager event monitoring service  
to enable continuous monitoring of the status of the storage subsystem. For  
more information about the importance of this information, see “Monitoring  
status through software.”  
Monitoring status through software  
Use the DS Storage Manager client to monitor the status of the storage subsystem.  
Run the software constantly, and check it frequently.  
Notes:  
1. You can only monitor storage subsystems that are within the management  
domain of the storage-management software.  
2. If you have not installed the DS Storage Manager Event Monitor service as part  
of the storage-management software installation, the DS Storage Manager  
Enterprise Management window must remain open. (If you close the window,  
you will not receive any alert notifications from the managed storage  
subsystems.)  
For more information, see the Enterprise Management online Help.  
Important: Refer to the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager Version 10  
Installation and Host Support Guide for the applicable operating system  
for instructions on how to install the DS Storage Manager host  
software.  
In addition, to download the latest version of the DS Storage Manager  
host software, the DS5020 storage subsystem controller firmware and  
NVSRAM, and the latest storage expansion enclosure ESM firmware,  
go to the following Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
The DS Storage Manager client provides the best way to diagnose and repair  
storage-server failures. The software can help you do the following:  
v Determine the nature of the failure  
v Locate the failed component  
v Determine the recovery procedures to repair the failure  
Although the storage subsystem has Needs Attention LEDs, these LEDs do not  
necessarily indicate which component has failed or needs to be replaced, or which  
type of recovery procedure you must perform. In some cases (such as in the case  
98 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
of a hard disk drive exceeding its PFAs), the Needs Attention LED does not turn on.  
Only the DS Storage Manager client can detect the failure.  
For example, the recovery procedure for a Predictive Failure Analysis® (PFA) flag  
(impending drive failure) on a drive varies depending on the drive status (hot spare,  
unassigned, RAID level, current logical drive status, and so on). Depending on the  
circumstances, a PFA flag on a drive can indicate a high risk of data loss (if the  
drive is in a RAID 0 volume) or a minimal risk (if the drive is unassigned). Only the  
DS Storage Manager client can identify the risk level and provide the necessary  
recovery procedures.  
Note: For PFA flags, the General-system-error LED and Drive Needs Attention  
LEDs do not turn on, so checking the LEDs will not notify you of the failure,  
even if the risk of data loss is high.  
Recovering from a storage-server failure might require you to perform procedures  
other than replacing the component (such as backing up the logical drive). The DS  
Storage Manager client gives these procedures.  
Attention: Not following the software-recovery procedures can result in data loss.  
In addition, always replace a failing component as soon as possible to minimize  
additional failures that might occur, causing loss of data access.  
Finding controller, storage expansion enclosure, and drive information  
You can view a Storage Subsystem Profile to find controller, enclosure, and drive  
information for the storage subsystem and attached storage expansion enclosures.  
To view a Storage System Profile, perform the following steps:  
1. Open the Storage Subsystem Management window from the DS Storage  
Manager Enterprise Management window.  
2. Select Storage Subsystem → View → Profile.  
A Storage Subsystem Profile window opens.  
3. Select the Controllers tab.  
4. Scroll through the list to find Board ID, Submodel ID, Product ID, and Product  
revision for the storage subsystem.  
5. Select the Enclosures tab.  
6. Scroll through the list to find the Product ID for supported storage expansion  
enclosures.  
7. Select the Drives tab.  
8. Scroll through the list to find the drive values such as Product ID.  
Firmware updates  
Attention: Save the storage subsystem profile before performing any controller or  
ESM firmware upgrades. Save the DS5020 storage subsystem profile and all  
configuration (*.cfg) files to a server disk that will remain accessible in the event of  
a DS5020 storage configuration failure. Do not save these files only to a LUN in the  
DS5020 storage subsystem.  
For optimal operation of the DS5020 and its attached storage expansion  
enclosures, the storage expansion enclosure ESM firmware, the DS5020 controller  
firmware, the hard drive firmware, and the NVSRAM (for controllers only) must be  
up to date. Go to the following Web site to get the latest updates.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
Always check the readme files that are included with the firmware packages for the  
most up-to-date information about firmware prerequisites, firmware update  
instructions, and host I/O restrictions, if any. Apply the necessary updates before  
configuring the storage subsystem arrays and logical drives. Subscribe to My  
Support for automatic notifications of firmware or Storage Manager software  
updates or any important information about your storage subsystems (see “Product  
updates and support notifications” on page 5).  
Attention: Read the readme file that is included in each firmware or DS Storage  
Manager software package for any limitations, subsystem firmware prerequisites, or  
download-sequence information. For example, the controller firmware code might  
require the storage expansion enclosure ESM firmware to be upgraded first to a  
particular version, or the controller firmware download might require the halting of  
I/Os to the DS5020 logical drives. Failure to observe the limitations, prerequisites,  
and dependencies in the readme file might result in a loss of data access. See  
“Finding DS5020 and DS4000-family readme files” on page xxiv to learn how to  
access the DS5020 readme files on the Web.  
Unless the readme file contains special requirements for the sequence in which you  
upgrade firmware, perform firmware upgrades in the following sequence:  
1. ESM firmware for the storage expansion enclosures  
2. Controller firmware  
3. Controller NVSRAM  
4. Drive firmware  
Troubleshooting the storage subsystem  
The DS Storage Manager is the best way to monitor the storage subsystem,  
diagnose a problem, and recover from a hardware failure. Run the DS Storage  
Manager continuously, and frequently check the configuration status.  
Use the following procedure to check the status of and identify a problem with the  
storage subsystem. If a problem has occurred, use the DS Storage Manager client  
software and the LEDs on the storage subsystem to help locate a failed component.  
1. Open the Subsystem Management window.  
2. Select the component button for each storage expansion enclosure in this  
storage subsystem, and view the status of each of the components.  
The status for each component is either Optimal or Needs Attention.  
3. Does any component have a Needs Attention status?  
v Yes - Go to step 4.  
v No - All components are Optimal. Go to step 6 on page 101.  
4. Select the Recovery Guru toolbar button. Perform the procedure in the  
Recovery Guru to correct the problem. The Recovery Guru might direct you to  
replace the failed component. If so, go to step 5.  
Attention: If the fault requires you to power off an attached storage expansion  
enclosure, you might need to reset the power to the DS5020 storage subsystem  
and all remaining storage expansion enclosures in the storage subsystem.  
Contact IBM Customer and Technical Support before powering off any attached  
storage expansion enclosures.  
5. If applicable, mute the alarm.  
100 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Check the indicator LEDs on the front and the back of the storage expansion  
enclosure.  
A green LED denotes a normal status; an amber LED denotes a hardware fault.  
7. Is an amber LED on?  
v Yes - Locate and troubleshoot the failed components. See “Checking the  
LEDs.”  
v No - You are finished with this procedure. If you are still experiencing a  
problem with this storage subsystem, create, save, and print a storage  
subsystem profile. This information might be helpful when troubleshooting.  
Contact IBM Customer and Technical Support for assistance. When the  
recovery procedure is completed, select Recheck in the Recovery Guru to  
rerun the Recovery Guru and to make sure that the problem has been  
corrected.  
Checking the LEDs  
The LEDs display the status of the storage subsystem and components. The color  
of the LED is important.  
v Green LEDs indicate a normal operating status  
v Amber LEDs (Needs Attention) indicate a possible failure  
v Blue LED on a CRU indicates that is safe to remove the component  
The DS5020 storage subsystem also has a blue Global Locate LED that is lit when  
the menu function is selected in the Subsystem Management window, causing the  
LOCATE command to be sent to the DS5020.  
It is important to check all the LEDs on the front and back of the storage subsystem  
when you turn on the power. During power up, the indicator LEDs blink  
intermittently as the storage subsystem and components complete the power-up  
process. In addition to checking for faults, you can use the LEDs on the front of the  
storage subsystem to determine if the drives are responding to I/O transmissions  
from the host.  
AC power supply and fan unit LEDs  
This section describes the primary power supply and fan unit LEDs on the DS5020  
storage subsystem.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Direct current Service action required  
Service action allowed  
(ok to remove) LED  
enabled LED  
(fault) LED  
Power supply and  
fan unit power LED  
Power supply and  
fan unit power LED  
Service action required Direct current  
Service action allowed  
(ok to remove) LED  
(fault) LED  
enabled LED  
Figure 66. Power supply and fan unit LEDs  
Table 12. Power supply and fan unit LEDs  
LED  
Normal Status  
On  
Problem Status  
Power supply and fan unit  
power  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Service Action Allowed (OK to Off  
Remove)  
Service Action Required  
(Fault)  
Off  
On  
Direct Current Enabled  
Front LEDs  
This section describes the primary LEDs and controls on the front of the DS5020  
storage subsystem.  
102 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Drive  
activity fault  
LED LED  
Drive  
Global Global  
locate summary power rate  
Global Link  
LED  
fault  
LED  
LED  
switch  
Figure 67. Front LEDs and controls  
Table 13. Front LEDs and controls  
LED  
Normal Status  
Problem Status  
Drive Activity LED  
On (not blinking) - No data is Off  
being processed  
Blinking - Data is being  
processed  
Drive Fault LED  
Global Locate  
Off  
On (not blinking)  
Blinking - Drive, volume, or  
storage array locate function  
On only when you activate  
the locate function in the DS  
Storage Manger Subsystem  
Management window menu.  
The normal state is off.  
N/A  
Global Summary Fault  
Global Power  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Link Rate Switch  
Set to the 4 Gbps position.  
N/A  
Battery unit LEDs  
This section describes the primary LEDs on the storage subsystem battery units.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Battery  
charging required  
LED (fault) LED  
Service action  
Service action  
allowed (ok to  
remove) LED  
Service action Battery  
Service action  
allowed (ok to  
remove) LED  
required  
charging  
LED  
(fault) LED  
Figure 68. Battery unit LEDs  
Table 14. Battery unit LEDs  
LED  
Normal Status  
Problem Status  
Service Action  
Allowed (OK to  
Remove)  
Off  
On  
Service Action  
Required (Fault)  
Off  
On  
Off  
Battery Charging  
Green means on,  
ready  
Blinking green means  
charging  
The Global Power, Global Summary Fault, and Global Locate LEDs are general  
indicators for the entire DS5020 storage subsystem (or configuration, in the case of  
the Global Summary Fault). The Global Summary Fault LED turns on if a fault  
condition is detected in any component in the storage subsystem configuration,  
including all attached storage expansion enclosures. The Global Power, Global  
Summary Fault, and Global Locate LEDs shine through the front bezel.  
Attention: If the Global Summary Fault LED lights, refer to the DS Storage  
Manager client software to determine the problem with the storage subsystem. Also,  
inspect the Needs Attention LEDs on the other components in the storage  
subsystem to help isolate the fault to a specific component.  
Controller LEDs  
This section describes the primary LEDs, controls, and connectors on the rear of  
the storage subsystem controller.  
Figure 69 on page 105, Figure 70 on page 105, and Figure 71 on page 106 show  
the three different DS5020 controller configurations that are available. Figure 69 on  
page 105 shows the base DS5020 storage subsystem, with two Fibre Channel host  
ports. For more information about DS5020 controller options and other components,  
see the “Parts listing” on page 160.  
104 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostic Heartbeat  
LED LED  
Service Service  
action action  
allowed required active  
Cache  
LED  
LED  
LED  
Host channel  
speed - L1 LED  
Host channel  
speed - L2 LED  
Drive channel  
port bypass LED  
Ethernet link  
activity LED  
Drive channel Ethernet link  
speed LED speed LED  
Figure 69. LEDs, controls, and connectors of controllers with two standard Fibre Channel  
host expansion channels  
Diagnostic Heartbeat  
LED  
LED  
Service Service  
action action  
allowed required active  
Cache  
LED  
LED  
LED  
Host channel  
speed - L1 LED  
Host channel  
speed - L2 LED port bypass LED  
Drive channel  
Ethernet link  
activity LED  
Drive channel Ethernet link  
speed LED speed LED  
Figure 70. LEDs, controls, and connectors of controllers with two standard and two optional  
Fibre Channel host expansion channels  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The iSCSI ports have the same LEDs as the management Ethernet ports. As  
with the Ethernet port LEDs, the iSCSI port LEDs represent link speed and  
link activity.  
Diagnostic Heartbeat  
LED  
LED  
Service Service  
action action  
allowed required active  
Cache  
LED  
LED  
LED  
Host channel  
speed - L1 LED  
Host channel  
speed - L2 LED port bypass LED  
Drive channel  
Ethernet link  
activity LED  
Drive channel Ethernet link  
speed LED speed LED  
Figure 71. LEDs, controls, and connectors of controllers with two standard Fibre Channel  
host expansion channels and two optional iSCSI host expansion channels  
Table 15. Rear controller LEDs, controls, and connectors  
LED  
Normal Status  
Problem Status  
Service Action Allowed (OK to Off  
Remove)  
On  
Service Action Required  
(Fault)  
Off  
On  
Cache Active  
Diagnostic  
On - Data is in cache  
Not applicable  
Not applicable  
Off - Caching is turned off. No  
data in cache  
On - Seven-segment LEDs  
indicate diagnostic code  
Off - Seven-segment LEDs  
indicate enclosure ID  
Heartbeat  
Blinking  
Off  
Host Channel Speed - L1  
Host Channel Speed - L2  
Ethernet Link Speed  
See Table 16 on page 107.  
See Table 16 on page 107.  
On - 1 Gbps  
Not applicable  
Off - 100 Mbps  
106 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 15. Rear controller LEDs, controls, and connectors (continued)  
LED  
Normal Status  
Problem Status  
Ethernet Link Activity  
On - link established  
Not applicable  
Off - no link established  
Blinking - activity  
Off  
Drive Channel Port Bypass  
On - No valid device detected  
and port is bypassed  
(One LED per port)  
(Also off if no SFP  
connected)  
Note: The drive channel  
consists of two FC ports. This  
LED indicates the drive port  
bypass status of one of the  
two FC ports that comprise a  
drive channel. The other drive  
channel port has its own  
Drive Channel Port Bypass  
LED.  
Drive Channel Speed - L1  
Drive Channel Speed - L2  
See Table 16.  
See Table 16.  
The L1 and L2 LEDs for each Fibre Channel host and drive channel combine to  
indicate the status and the operating speed of each host and drive channel.  
Table 16. Host and drive channel LED definitions  
L1  
L2  
Definition  
Off  
Off  
When both LEDs for a host or drive channel are off, this indicates one or more  
of the following conditions:  
v The host or drive channel ports are bad or the SFPs are faulty.  
v An SFP module is inserted with no Fibre Channel cable attached.  
Note: If the SFP is inserted in a drive port with no Fibre Channel attached,  
the associated drive port bypassed LED will also be lit. In addition, the L1  
and L2 LEDs will be unlit.  
v No SFP module is inserted in one or both of the host or drive ports in the  
channel.  
On  
Off  
The host is operating at 2 Gbps. The drive channel is operating at 1 Gbps.  
Note: This pattern is not applicable in the drive port because the DS5020 does  
not support 1 Gbps Fibre Channel speed.  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
The host is operating at 4 Gbps. The drive channel is operating at 2 Gbps.  
The host is operating at 8 Gbps. The drive channel is operating at 4 Gbps.  
Seven-segment numeric display LEDs  
The numeric display consists of two seven-segment LEDs that provide information  
about enclosure identification and diagnostics. Figure 72 on page 108 shows the  
numeric display and the diagnostic LED.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostic  
LED  
Seven-segment  
display  
Figure 72. Numeric display LEDs  
When you turn on the power to the storage subsystem, the seven-segment LEDs  
show 88 before the boot firmware starts to run. After the boot code starts, - - is  
displayed.  
When the storage subsystem is operating normally, the numeric display shows the  
enclosure identification (enclosure ID) of the storage subsystem.  
If an error has occurred and the Needs Attention LED is on, the numeric display  
shows diagnostic information. The numeric display indicates the information is  
diagnostic by illuminating an LED that appears as a decimal point between the  
display numbers. The diagnostic LED tuns off when the numeric display shows the  
storage subsystem enclosure ID. The numeric display shows various diagnostic  
codes as the enclosures perform the startup process after each power cycle or  
reset. After diagnostics are complete, the current storage subsystem enclosure ID is  
displayed.  
Diagnostic codes in the form of Lx or Hx, where x is a hexadecimal digit, indicate  
storage subsystem state information. In general, these codes are displayed only  
when the storage subsystem is in a non-operational state. The storage subsystem  
might be non-operational due to a configuration problem (such as mismatched  
types), or it might be non-operational due to hardware faults. If the storage  
subsystem is non-operational due to system configuration, the storage subsystem  
Needs Attention LED is off. If the storage subsystem is non-operational due to a  
hardware fault, the storage subsystem Needs Attention LED is on. The definitions  
for Lx diagnostic codes are listed in Table 17.  
Table 17. Numeric display diagnostic codes  
Value  
Controller State  
Description  
L0  
Suspended  
Mismatched controller board  
ID  
L1  
L2  
L3  
L4  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Missing interconnect canister  
Persistent memory errors  
Persistent hardware errors  
Persistent data protection  
errors  
L5  
L6  
L7  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Suspended  
ACS failure  
Unsupported host card  
Submodel identifier not set or  
mismatched  
L8  
L9  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Memory configuration error  
Link speed mismatch  
108 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 17. Numeric display diagnostic codes (continued)  
Value  
LA  
Controller State  
Suspended  
Description  
Reserved  
LB  
Suspended  
Host card configuration error  
LC  
Suspended  
Persistent cache backup  
configuration error  
LD  
LE  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Mixed cache memory DIMMs  
Uncertified cache memory  
DIMM sizes  
LF  
LH  
Suspended  
Suspended  
Lockdown with limited  
SYMbol support  
Controller firmware mismatch  
Powering off the storage subsystem  
The DS5020 is designed to run continuously. After you turn it on, do not turn it off.  
Turn off the power only in the following situations:  
v Instructions in a hardware or software procedure require that you turn off the  
power.  
v An IBM technical support representative instructs you to turn off the power.  
v A power outage or emergency situation occurs, see “Restoring power after an  
unexpected shutdown” on page 112.  
Turning off the storage subsystem  
Use the following procedure to turn off the power for the DS5020.  
Attention: Except in an emergency, never turn off the power if any Needs  
Attention LEDs are on. Correct the fault before you turn off the power. Use the DS  
Storage Manager client and the Needs Attention LEDs to check the overall status of  
the DS5020. All LEDs should be green on the front of the storage subsystem. If  
they are not, use the DS Storage Manager client to diagnose the problem. This  
ensures that the DS5020 will power up correctly later.  
The DS5020 is designed to run continuously. After you turn on the DS5020, do not  
turn it off. Turn off the power only in the following situations:  
v Instructions in a hardware or software procedure require that you turn off the  
power.  
v An IBM technical support representative instructs you to turn off the power.  
v A power outage or emergency situation occurs, see “Restoring power after an  
unexpected shutdown” on page 112.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
CAUTION:  
This unit has more than one power source. To remove all power from the unit,  
all MAINS must be disconnected.  
Attention: Turning off and turning on power without waiting for the storage  
subsystem disk drives to spin down can damage the drives and might cause data  
loss. Always let at least 70 seconds elapse from when you turn off the power until  
you turn on the power again.  
Power-off overview  
Review the following information before you continue with the power-off  
procedure below.  
Turn off the power to each device based on the following shutdown sequence:  
1. Turn off power to the host before the storage subsystem. If the host must  
stay powered on to support an existing network, see the operating system  
documentation for information about disconnecting the storage subsystem  
logical drives from the host before the storage subsystem is powered off.  
2. Turn off power to the storage subsystem before you turn off power to the  
storage expansion enclosures. Turn off both power supply switches on the  
back of the storage subsystem.  
3. Turn off power to other supporting devices (for example, management  
stations, Fibre Channel switches, or Ethernet switches).  
Note: You do not need to perform this step if you are servicing only the  
storage subsystem.  
110 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use the following procedure to turn off power to one or more storage subsystems  
for a planned shutdown. To turn off power for an unplanned shutdown, see  
“Restoring power after an unexpected shutdown” on page 112.  
Before proceeding, use the Storage Manager client to determine the status of the  
system components and special instructions. The operating system software might  
require you to perform other procedures before you turn off the power.  
1. Stop all I/O activity to each storage subsystem.  
2. Remove the front cover from the storage subsystem, if applicable.  
3. Determine the status of all storage subsystems and components in the  
configuration by completing the following steps:  
a. Check all LEDs on each component in the storage expansion enclosures.  
Make sure that all the LEDs show normal status.  
b. Check all LEDs on each component in the storage subsystem. Make sure  
that all the LEDs show normal status.  
c. Open the Subsystem Management window for the configuration and  
display the Physical View for the configuration.  
d. Review the status of the configuration components shown in the  
Subsystem Management window by selecting the applicable component  
button for each storage subsystem.  
The status for each component will be either Optimal or Needs Attention.  
4. Are the LEDs indicating normal operation, and is the status Optimal on all  
configuration components?  
v Yes - Go to step 6.  
v No - Go to step 5.  
5. To diagnose and correct the fault, complete the following steps:  
a. Run the Recovery Guru by selecting the Recovery Guru toolbar button in  
the Subsystem Management window.  
b. Complete the recovery procedure.  
If the Recovery Guru directs you to replace a failed component, use the  
individual LEDs to locate the failed component.  
c. When the recovery procedure is completed, select Recheck in the  
Recovery Guru. This action reruns the Recovery Guru to make sure that  
the problem has been fixed.  
d. If the problem has not been fixed, contact your IBM service representative.  
Do not turn off power until all problems are corrected.  
6. Check the Cache Active LED, and verify that it is off.  
If the Cache Active LED is on steady, the cache contains data. Wait for the  
data to clear from cache memory before turning off the power.  
7. Check the LEDs on the storage expansion enclosures to verify that all Drive  
Active LEDs are on steady (not blinking).  
If one or more LEDs are blinking, data is being written to or from the drives.  
Wait for all Active LEDs to stop blinking.  
8. Turn off the power switch on the back of each controller in the storage  
subsystem.  
Note: Until the power switch on each controller is turned off, power still  
remains turned on for the both controllers; therefore, the seven-segment  
display on each controller stays on until the power switch on each  
controller is turned off.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Turn off both power switches on the back of each storage expansion enclosure  
in the configuration.  
CAUTION:  
The power switch on the power supply and fan unit does not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the device. The DS5020 storage subsystem  
might also have more than one connection to ac power. To remove all  
electrical current from the device, ensure that all ac power cords are  
disconnected from the power supply and fan unit ac input connectors.  
10. Remove (unplug) all of the power cords from the DS5020 power supply  
connectors.  
11. After you perform the necessary maintenance procedures, turn on the power  
using the procedure in “Turning on the storage subsystem” on page 95.  
Performing an emergency shutdown  
Attention: Emergency situations might include fire, flood, extreme weather  
conditions, or other hazardous circumstances. If a power outage or emergency  
situation occurs, always turn off all power switches on all computing equipment.  
This helps to safeguard your equipment from potential damage due to electrical  
surges when power is restored. If the storage subsystem loses power unexpectedly,  
it might be due to a hardware failure in the power system or in the midplane.  
Complete the following steps to shut down the system during an emergency:  
1. If you have time, stop all I/O activity to the storage subsystem by shutting down  
the host or disconnecting the storage subsystem logical drives through the host.  
2. Check the LEDs. Make note of any Needs Attention LEDs that are on so you  
can correct the problem when you turn on the power again.  
3. Turn off all power supply switches, starting with the DS5020 storage subsystem  
first, and followed by the storage expansion enclosures. Then, unplug the power  
cables from the storage subsystem.  
CAUTION:  
This unit has more than one power source. To remove all power from the  
unit, all MAINS must be disconnected.  
CAUTION:  
The power switch on the power supply and fan unit does not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the device. The DS5020 storage subsystem  
might also have more than one connection to ac power. To remove all  
electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are  
disconnected from the power supply and fan unit input connectors.  
Restoring power after an unexpected shutdown  
Use the following procedure to restore power to the storage subsystem in a  
configuration after an unplanned shutdown.  
112 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Risk of severe electrical shock – Never turn on the power to any equipment if  
there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Doing so might cause severe  
electrical shock  
1. After the emergency situation is over or power is restored, visually check the  
storage subsystem for damage. Is there evidence of damage to any of the  
storage subsystem components, cables, or equipment attached to the storage  
subsystem?  
v Yes – Do not continue with this procedure. Contact your IBM service  
representative for assistance. Depending on the current service agreements,  
you might need to return the equipment to the factory or local service center  
for repair.  
v No – Go to step 2.  
Potential data loss – Before resetting circuit breakers in the cabinet, make  
sure that the storage subsystem and storage expansion enclosures power  
switches are turned off. Resetting circuit breakers after an emergency  
situation while the storage subsystem and storage expansion enclosure  
power switches are turned on can cause potential data loss because the  
configuration components might not be powered on in the correct sequence.  
2. After you check the storage subsystem for damage, make sure that the power  
switches are in the off position; then plug in the DS5020 power cables, if  
required.  
3. Check the system documentation of the hardware devices that you want to turn  
on and determine the proper startup sequence.  
Note: Be sure to turn on all of the storage expansion enclosures and verify that  
there are not any ESM or power supply and fan unit fault LEDs lit before  
you turn on the DS5020.  
In addition, consider the following items:  
v The storage subsystem supports simultaneous power-up of the system  
components, but you must always follow the power-up sequence listed  
in the “Best practices guidelines” on page 5 section during any  
attended power-up procedure.  
v A storage subsystem in an optimal state recovers automatically from  
an unexpected shutdown and unattended simultaneous restoration of  
power to system components. After power is restored, contact IBM  
technical support if any of the following conditions occur:  
– The storage subsystem logical drives and subsystems do not  
display in the Storage Manager graphical user interface (GUI).  
– The storage subsystem logical drives and subsystems do not come  
online.  
– The storage subsystem logical drives and subsystems seem to be  
degraded.  
4. Turn on the power to each device, based on the startup sequence.  
5. Turn on any attached disconnect devices.  
6. Turn on both of the power supply switches on the DS5020. The green LEDs on  
the front and the back of the DS5020 remain lit. If other amber Fault LEDs light,  
see “Solving problems” on page 153.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recovering from an overheated power supply and fan unit  
Each storage subsystem contains two power supply and fan units. Each power  
supply and fan unit contains a built-in temperature sensor designed to prevent it  
from overheating. Under normal operating conditions, with an ambient air  
temperature range of 10° C to 35° C (50° F to 95° F), the fans in the power supply  
and fan units maintain a proper operating temperature inside the module.  
If the internal temperature reaches 65° C (149° F), the power supply shuts down  
automatically. If both power supplies shut down because of overheating, the module  
has no power, and all indicator lights are off.  
The following factors can cause the power supplies to overheat:  
v An unusually high room temperature  
v Fan failures in the power supply and fan units  
v Defective circuitry in the power supply  
v Blocked air vents  
v Failures in other devices in the configuration or cabinet  
If a fan failure causes overheating or the operating environment becomes too hot  
(greater than 55° C), the Global Fault LED on the storage expansion enclosure  
turns on. The power supply and fan unit Fault and Service Action Allowed (SAA®)  
LEDs on the back of the storage subsystem also turn on. “Controller LEDs” on page  
104 shows the location of these LEDs.  
Attention: Because the power supply and fan unit CRU Fault and SAA LEDs are  
lit when the operating environment temperature is too hot (greater than 55° C), do  
not assume the power supply and fan unit CRU is bad. Take action to cool down  
the environment first. When the operating environment temperature is within the  
specified operating environment range, the power supply and fan unit Fault and  
SAA LEDs will be unlit if there are no problems with the power supply and fan unit  
CRU.  
If the module temperature exceeds 45° C (113° F), the storage management  
software displays a Needs Attention icon in the Subsystem Management window. If  
event monitoring is enabled, and event notification is configured, the software  
issues the following two critical problem notifications:  
v If one power supply shuts down, the storage management software displays a  
Needs Attention status in the Subsystem Management window.  
v If both power supplies shut down, the module shuts down, and the storage  
management software displays a Not Responding status in the Array  
Management window.  
Use the following procedure to resume normal operation after a power supply  
shutdown.  
Attention: Risk of damage from overheating - The power supplies  
automatically shut down when the air temperature inside the cabinet reaches 68°  
C (154° F). If the power supplies shut down, immediately remove all cabinet  
panels to help cool the cabinet air temperature and to prevent damage to the  
DS5020 storage subsystem configuration components.  
1. Remove the front cover.  
2. If applicable, mute the alarm.  
3. Did you use the procedure “Troubleshooting the storage subsystem ” on page  
100 to identify an overheating problem?  
114 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Yes - Go to step 4.  
v No - Perform the procedure “Troubleshooting the storage subsystem ” on  
page 100 to verify that the power supplies have shut down because of an  
overheating problem, and then go to step 4.  
4. Stop I/O activity to the storage subsystem and all attached storage expansion  
enclosures.  
5. Take all or some of the following measures to alleviate the overheating  
problem:  
v Removing all panels from the cabinet immediately  
v Using external fans to cool the area  
v Shutting down the power to the storage expansion enclosure, using the  
procedure described in “Performing an emergency shutdown” on page 112  
6. Wait for the air temperature in and around the storage subsystem to cool.  
After the temperature inside the power supplies cools to below 65° C (149° F),  
the storage subsystem is capable of power-up recovery without operator  
intervention. After the air has cooled, the power supplies turn on automatically.  
If the power supplies restart automatically, the controllers will reset and return  
to normal operation.  
7. Did the power supply and fan units restart automatically?  
v Yes - Go to step 9.  
v No - Go to step 8.  
8. Turn off the power switch on each controller in the storage subsystem, power  
off all connected storage expansion enclosures, and flip the disconnected  
devices to the OFF position. Wait 1 minute and then turn on power to all  
connected storage expansion enclosures and flip the disconnected devices to  
the ON position.  
CAUTION:  
This unit has more than one power source. To remove all power from the  
unit, all MAINS must be disconnected.  
CAUTION:  
The power switch on the power supply and fan unit does not turn off the  
electrical current supplied to the device. The DS5020 storage subsystem  
might also have more than one connection to power. To remove all  
electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are  
disconnected from the power supply and fan unit input connectors.  
While the storage expansion enclosure powers up, the LEDs on the front and  
the back of the module blink intermittently. Depending on your configuration,  
the storage expansion enclosure can take between 20 seconds and several  
minutes to power on.  
9. Turn on both power switches on the back of the storage subsystem.  
A storage subsystem can take 10 seconds to power on and up to 15 minutes  
for the battery self-test to complete. During this time, the LEDs on the front  
and the back of the modules blink intermittently.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10. Check the status LEDs on the front and back of the storage subsystem.  
a. Note the status of the LEDs on the front and back of each module.  
A green LED indicates a normal status; amber LEDs indicate a hardware  
fault.  
b. Open the Subsystem Management window for the storage array.  
c. Select the applicable components button for each module in the Physical  
View of the Subsystem Management window to view the status of its  
components.  
The status for each component is either Optimal or Needs Attention.  
11. Does each module display green LEDs only, and is the status Optimal for each  
module component?  
v Yes - Go to step 13.  
v No - Go to step 12.  
12. Diagnose and correct the fault.  
a. To run the Recovery Guru, select the Recovery Guru toolbar button in the  
Subsystem Management window.  
b. Complete the recovery procedure.  
If the Recovery Guru directs you to replace a failed component, locate and  
troubleshoot that component. See “Checking the LEDs” on page 101.  
c. When the procedure is completed, rerun the Recovery Guru to make sure  
that the problem has been corrected by selecting Recheck in the Recovery  
Guru.  
d. If the problem persists, contact IBM Customer and Technical Support.  
13. Replace the bezel on the storage expansion enclosure, if applicable.  
Cache memory and cache battery  
Each RAID controller in the DS5020 storage subsystem contains either 1 GB or 2  
GB of cache memory to store read and write operations. (Both RAID controllers in  
the DS5020 must have the same amount of cache memory.) The battery unit  
contains enough charge to back up the cached data in each controller to a flash  
drive in the event of a DS5020 power failure.  
Attention: There are different replacement FRU part numbers for the DS5020  
controller with certain cache sizes. The DS5020 storage subsystem profile has the  
information about the installed cache memory size in the DS5020 controllers. Refer  
to the storage subsystem profile and see “Parts listing” on page 160 for the correct  
FRU part number for the DS5020 controller.  
Cache memory  
Cache memory is memory on the RAID controller that is used for intermediate  
storage of read and write data on the DS5020 RAID controllers. Using cache  
memory can increase system performance. The data for a read operation from the  
host might be in the cache memory from a previous operation (thus eliminating the  
need to access the drive itself), and a write operation is completed when it is written  
to the cache, rather than to the drives.  
The RAID controller has a Cache Active LED that displays the current status of the  
cache. The LED is on if there is data in the cache, and it is off if there is no data in  
the cache.  
116 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If caching is enabled and the Cache Active LED never comes on during I/O activity,  
it indicates one of the following conditions:  
v The cache memory from either controller A or controller B has failed.  
v The cache sizes in controller A and controller B are not the same.  
v The battery has failed. (In this case, one or both of the green Battery LEDs will  
be off and one or both amber Battery Needs Attention LEDs will be lit.)  
Note: Always use the DS Storage Manager client to check your cache memory  
settings before assuming a hardware failure.  
Figure 73 shows the locations of the Cache Active LEDs on the front of the RAID  
controllers.  
Cache  
active  
LED  
Cache  
active  
LED  
Figure 73. Cache Active LEDs  
Subsystem cache battery  
The backup battery unit provides power to back up the cache memory of each  
controller onto flash drives in the event of a power failure. Each battery unit  
contains a sealed, rechargeable SMART lithium ion battery. The battery unit  
contains enough charge to back up the cached data in each controller to a flash  
drive in the event of a power failure.  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only an equivalent type battery  
recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a  
lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by the same  
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Replace the battery units in the DS5020 when they are identified as failing by the  
DS Storage Manager Subsystem Management window, or when the Battery LEDs  
or Battery Needs Attention LEDs light. These LEDs are located on the power supply  
and fan units and on the battery unit respectively, as shown in Figure 74 on page  
119.  
Replace only the battery unit that is indicated as failed by the LEDs or in the DS  
Storage Manager Subsystem Management window. You do not need to replace  
both battery units when the Battery LEDs indicate that only one battery unit has  
failed.  
If the battery age expires, do not call IBM technical support to replace the battery.  
Instead, reset the battery age using the procedure described in the Storage  
Manager online help. Replace the battery only when it is in a failed state, as  
indicated by the Storage Manager Recovery Guru.  
Each power supply and fan unit has green Battery LEDs on the back that indicates  
the battery status of each battery unit, as follows:  
v The LED is on and remains steady when the battery is fully charged.  
v The LED flashes when the battery is charging or performing a self-test.  
v The LED is off if the battery or the battery charger has failed.  
The battery unit also has a battery failure indicator LED that is located on the  
battery unit. This LED will light if the battery fails to hold a charge.  
The battery performs a learn cycle the first time the storage subsystem is turned on,  
and again every eight weeks thereafter, to assess the charge capacity of the  
battery. If the battery fails the learn cycle or takes too much time to reach full  
charge, the Battery LED turns off (indicating a battery fault) and the DS Storage  
Manager identifies the battery as failed.  
The learn cycle takes up to three hours. During this time, the cache will be active if  
the battery is in optimal condition. If the learn cycle is interrupted, the current learn  
cycle will be terminated and the battery will perform a new learn cycle at the next  
scheduled interval (eight weeks from the current learn cycle). A learn cycle  
118 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
interruption is caused if you remove the battery from the controller chassis, reset  
the power to the storage subsystem, or if a storage expansion enclosure or battery  
overheats.  
Data caching starts after the battery is charged to the programmed voltage level,  
which occurs when the storage subsystem power is first turned on, when a new  
battery is installed to replace a failed battery, or when the subsystem power is  
turned on after months of inactivity.  
Attention: Write caching is suspended while a battery pack is either charging or  
self-testing.  
Figure 74 shows the location of the Battery LEDs.  
Battery  
charging required  
LED (fault) LED  
Service action  
Service action  
allowed (ok to  
remove) LED  
Service action Battery  
Service action  
allowed (ok to  
remove) LED  
required  
charging  
LED  
(fault) LED  
Figure 74. Battery unit LEDs  
Chapter 4. Operating the storage subsystem 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
120 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components  
This chapter contains information about replacing a controller, E-DDM CRU, power  
supply and fan unit CRU, battery unit, SFP module, and midplane.  
Attention: Always replace a failed component as soon as possible. The Recovery  
Guru menu function in the DS5020 storage subsystem identifies failed components.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Static electricity can damage electronic devices and your system. To  
avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until  
you are ready to install them.  
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following  
precautions:  
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around  
you.  
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.  
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.  
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and possibly damage the  
device.  
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted  
metal part of the storage subsystem for at least two seconds. This drains static  
electricity from the package and from your body.  
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into your storage  
subsystem without setting it down. If it is necessary to set the device down, place  
it in its static-protective package. Do not place the device on your storage  
subsystem cover or any metal surface.  
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather because heating  
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.  
Service Action Allowed Status LED  
Each controller, power supply and fan unit, and battery unit has a blue Service  
Action Allowed status LED. The purpose of the Service Action Allowed status LED  
is to help make sure that a component is not removed before it is safe to do so. Do  
not remove any storage subsystem component unless the Service Action Allowed  
status LED for that component is lit.  
Attention  
Never remove a controller, power supply and fan unit, or battery unit unless  
the Service Action Allowed status LED is turned on. Doing so can result in a  
potential loss of data availability. If the Needs Attention LED is lit and the  
associated Service Action Allowed status LED is not lit, then you must perform  
additional diagnostics before you can remove the indicated component. Use  
the Recovery Guru instructions in the DS Storage Manager Subsystem  
Management window or refer to the applicable component replacement  
instructions in this chapter for the additional diagnostics required in this case.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Service Action Allowed status LED automatically turns on or off as conditions  
change. Wait at least two minutes after you replace each component for the  
controller to recognize the new component and update the LED status. In most  
cases when a single component fails, the Service Action Allowed status LED turns  
on steadily when the Needs Attention status LED is turned on for the component.  
Replacing a controller  
Attention: Before you replace a controller, verify the following:  
v The replacement controller part number matches the part number of the  
controller to be replaced. To provide full functionality, the two controllers must  
have the same cache memory capacity, same number of host ports, same types  
of host ports (FC or iSCSI), and same FRU part number. Inserting a  
non-compatible controller causes the controller to be placed in a lockout state by  
the other controller in the DS5020 chassis.  
Note: The DS5020 storage subsystem controller FRU is not compatible with the  
DS4200 Express or DS4700 storage subsystem controller FRU. See the  
“Parts listing” on page 160 for more information about compatible  
controllers.  
v Both power supply and fan units must be connected and powered on with no  
Needs Attention LEDs lit. Make sure that the Power LEDs on each of the power  
supply and fan units are lit. If either of the power supply and fan units is not  
optimal, replace that component before you proceed with the controller  
replacement procedure.  
v If you are replacing an optimal controller, first make sure that the other controller  
is optimal and that the Fibre Channel path from the hosts to the other controller  
is also optimal.  
Each controller has a unique hardware Ethernet address, which is printed on a label  
on the front.  
Use the following procedure to replace a controller in an DS5020 storage  
subsystem:  
1. Use the DS Storage Manager client software to print a storage subsystem  
profile. Move logical drive ownership to the other controller. If the controller you  
are replacing has failed but is still operating, move the failed controller to an  
Offline state.  
Attention: Never remove a controller unless the Service Action Allowed  
status LED is turned on. Doing so can result in a potential loss of data.  
2. Locate the failed controller by checking the Needs Attention status LEDs on  
the controllers in the storage subsystem.  
3. Is the Service Action Allowed status LED turned on?  
v Yes – Go to step 4.  
v No – Another component might require attention before you can remove the  
controller. Use the Recovery Guru function in the DS5020 Subsystem  
Management window to identify and correct any additional failures. If there  
are none, proceed with step 4 to replace the controller.  
Electrostatic discharge can damage sensitive components. Touching the  
storage subsystem or its components without using a proper ground might  
damage the equipment. To avoid damage, use proper antistatic protection  
while handling any components.  
4. Put on antistatic protection.  
122 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Unpack the new controller. Save all packing materials in the event you need to  
return the new controller.  
6. Determine whether the replacement controller will serve as controller A or  
controller B (controller A is inserted in the left controller bay; controller B is  
inserted in the right controller bay), and then apply the controller labels for host  
channels, drive channels, and numeric display to the replacement controller.  
The controller labels and instructions are included with the replacement  
controller. Make sure that the labels are aligned properly and do not cover any  
ports or LEDs.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices,  
or transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product  
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no  
serviceable parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view  
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the  
beam.  
Class 1 Laser statement  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Apparell À Laser de Calsse 1  
IEC 825-11993 CENELEC EN 60 825  
Attention: Handle and install fiber-optic cables properly to avoid degraded  
performance or loss of communications with devices. For specific handling  
guidelines, see “Handling fiber-optic cables” on page 47.  
7. Disconnect all attached interface cables from the failed controller, including the  
SFP modules. Make sure that you label each cable so that you can reconnect  
them correctly to the new controller.  
Use the following procedure to remove the SFPs from the RAID controller that  
has failed:  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a. Remove the LC-LC Fibre Channel cable from the SFP module. For more  
information, see “Handling fiber-optic cables” on page 47.  
b. Unlock the SFP module latch:  
v For SFP modules that contain plastic tabs, unlock the SFP module latch  
by pulling the plastic tab outward 10°, as shown in Figure 75.  
Plastictab  
Prot ect i ve cap  
10o  
SFP m o d u l e  
Figure 75. Unlocking the SFP module latch - plastic variety  
v For SFP modules that contain wire tabs, unlock the SFP module latch by  
pulling the wire latch outward 90°, as shown in Figure 76.  
Wire tab  
Prot ect iv e cap  
o
90  
SFP m od u l e  
Figure 76. Unlocking the SFP module latch - wire variety  
c. With the SFP latch in the unlocked position, extract the SFP module.  
v For SFP modules that contain plastic tabs, slide the SFP module out of  
the port.  
v For SFP modules that contain wire tabs, grasp the wire latch and pull  
the SFP module out of the minihub port.  
d. Replace the protective cap on the SFP module.  
e. Place the SFP module into a static-protective package.  
f. Replace the protective cap on the port.  
8. Squeeze the controller latch and pull the lever open 90° (so that the lever is  
horizontal) to release the controller from the latch. The controller latch is a  
coral colored tab on the lever.  
Note: The lever rotates upward or downward 90°, depending on whether the  
controller you are removing is the right or left controller CRU.  
9. Slowly pull the lever away from the chassis to remove the controller from the  
bay. Use two hands when releasing the controller levers. Figure 77 on page  
125  
124 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
125 shows the controller sliding from the storage subsystem chassis.  
Lever  
Figure 77. Removing a controller from the DS5020  
10. If the new controller does not have the cache battery backup unit already  
installed, follow the instructions in “Replacing a battery unit” on page 144 to  
remove the cache backup battery from the existing controller unit and insert it  
into the new controller CRU.  
11. Install the new controller.  
a. Slide one controller into the empty slot in the storage subsystem. Be sure  
that the lever is pulled straight out as you slide the controller in, as shown  
in Figure 78.  
Notch  
Lever  
Guide pin  
Figure 78. Installing a controller  
b. As you slide the controller into the empty slot, make sure the guide pins on  
the side of the controller fit into the notches. After the guide pins fit into the  
notches and the controller fits snugly into the bay, push the lever downward  
or upward 90°, depending on whether the controller is inserted in the A or  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B controller bay to fully latch it into place. Do not force fit. The controller is  
designed to prevent it from being inserted into the chassis incorrectly.  
Attention: Make sure that the levers lock into place in the storage  
subsystem chassis.  
c. Repeat step 11a on page 125 and step 11b on page 125 to replace the  
second controller.  
12. Wait up to 5 minutes for the DS Storage Manager client software to recognize  
the new controller.  
13. Complete any remaining Recovery Guru procedures for controller replacement,  
if needed.  
14. Check the LEDs on the new controller to verify that the controller is fully  
operational.  
15. Remove the antistatic protection.  
16. Use the DS Storage Manager client Subsystem Management window to check  
the status of all components in the storage subsystem.  
v If the new controller is online and the DS Storage Manager client  
Subsystem Management window indicates normal operation, go to step 19.  
v If the new controller is online and the DS Storage Manager client  
Subsystem Management window indicates a problem status, go to  
“Troubleshooting the storage subsystem ” on page 100.  
v If the new controller is offline, go to step 17.  
17. If the newly inserted controller is in an offline state, see the DS Storage  
Manager client online help for instructions on bringing the controller online.  
If necessary, open the DS Storage Manager Subsystem Management window  
and place the controller on-line; select the off-line controller and click  
Advanced ꢀ Recovery ꢀ Place controller online.  
18. Verify the state of the LEDs on the newly inserted controller. See “Controller  
LEDs” on page 104. You can also use the DS Storage Manager client  
Subsystem Management window to identify any new faults. Do any storage  
subsystems have a fault (Needs Attention) status?  
v Yes – Select the Recovery Guru toolbar button in the Subsystem  
Management window, and complete the recovery procedure. If the problem  
persists, contact your IBM service representative.  
v No – Go to step 19.  
19. Use the DS Storage Manager client software to print a new storage subsystem  
profile.  
Working with hot-swap E-DDMs  
This section explains how you can increase the storage subsystem capacity by  
adding more E-DDMs or by replacing existing E-DDMs with ones that have a larger  
capacity.  
Before you begin, complete the following tasks:  
v Read the safety and handling guidelines in “Safety” on page xiii and in “Handling  
static-sensitive devices” on page 29.  
v Make sure that your current system configuration is working properly.  
v Back up all important data before you make changes to data storage devices.  
Before you install or remove E-DDM CRUs, review the following information:  
126 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Blank trays: A storage subsystem without a full set of E-DDMs (16) contains  
blank trays in the unused drive bays. Before installing new E-DDMs, you must  
remove these empty trays. Save the empty trays for future use. Each of the 16  
bays must always contain either a blank tray or a hot-swap E-DDM.  
For proper cooling and EMC protection, do not leave a drive slot open without  
either a drive blank or an E-DDM CRU inserted.  
v E-DDM CRUs:  
– The DS5020 storage subsystem supports 4 Gbps Fibre Channel and SATA  
E-DDMs. The link rate setting speed must be set accordingly. See “Verifying  
the link rate setting” on page 136 for more information.  
– When adding E-DDM CRUs, if you are not installing all 16 E-DDM CRUs into  
the storage subsystem, install the E-DDM CRUs from left to right  
consecutively.  
– For optimum performance, never insert an E-DDM into a storage subsystem  
without first confirming the drive firmware level. In the event of a drive  
firmware mismatch, schedule down time as soon as possible to upgrade the  
drive firmware to the same version. For information about supported drive  
firmware versions, refer to the IBM Storage Systems support Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/disk  
– Use of non-supported drives in the drive modules can cause the storage  
subsystem to fail.  
– In configurations with mixed storage expansion enclosures, all storage  
expansion enclosures on a fibre loop must be operating at the same interface  
speed.  
– Make sure that the speed of the E-DDM CRU you are adding is supported in  
the storage subsystem. For example, do not install a 2 Gbps E-DDM CRUs in  
a storage subsystem that supports only 4 Gbps E-DDMs.  
– E-DDM CRUs are not interchangeable between EXP520 and EXP810 storage  
expansion enclosures.  
– After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or  
reseating it to allow it to properly spin down. Failure to do so might cause  
undesired events.  
Attention:  
Before you turn on the power to the DS5020 storage subsystem, it must be  
populated with at least two E-DDMs.  
If at least two E-DDMs are not installed in the DS5020, an insufficient load to the  
enclosure power supplies might cause them to intermittently appear as failed,  
falsely indicating the power supplies are bad. All of the E-DDMs in the DS5020  
storage subsystem and the connected storage expansion enclosure or  
enclosures must contain no prior configuration data.  
v E-DDM CRU labels: A label is provided on the front of each E-DDM. Use this  
label to record the location information for each E-DDM before you remove it.  
Make sure that you keep track of the E-DDMs and their corresponding bays.  
Also, record the location information in Table 24 on page 166. If you install an  
E-DDM in the wrong bay, you might lose data.  
v E-DDM LEDs: Each E-DDM CRU tray has two associated LEDs, a green Activity  
LED and an amber Fault LED. These LEDs indicate the status for that drive. See  
Table 18 on page 128 for the E-DDM LED states and descriptions.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v E-DDM CRUs are not interchangeable between the DS5020 and other DS4000  
storage subsystems.  
Table 18. Drive LED activity  
LED  
LED state  
Descriptions  
Activity LED  
Flashing green The green LED flashes to indicate Fibre Channel activity to  
the drive.  
Activity LED  
Fault LED  
Fault LED  
Steady green  
The green LED lights to indicate that the drive is properly  
installed and is spun up by the DS5020 controller.  
Flashing  
amber  
The amber LED flashes to indicate that a drive has been  
identified by the software.  
Steady amber The amber LED lights to indicate a drive failure due to bad  
or uncertified drive. The green activity LED might flash  
once every 2 seconds, remain steady green, or be unlit.  
Activity and  
Fault LEDs  
All unlit  
Check for and resolve one of the following situations:  
v DS5020 is turned off.  
v DS5020 link rate speed is not set correctly.  
Activity LED  
Flashing once Check for and resolve one of the following situations:  
every 2  
seconds  
v The controller did not complete the boot process.  
v Storage subsystem controller firmware is not correct.  
Note: Drives are spun down because they are in a "not  
compatible state″, ″exported state″, or ″locked state″ due to  
an invalid security key.  
Activity and  
Fault LEDs  
Flashing  
together in a  
certain pattern  
Drive failure due to the incorrect link rate speed setting or  
internal drive hardware failures.  
v Fibre Channel loop IDs: When you install an E-DDM in the storage subsystem,  
the drive tray connects into a printed circuit board called the midplane. The  
midplane sets the Fibre Channel loop ID automatically, based on the setting of  
the enclosure ID switch and the physical location (bay) of the drive CRU.  
v Hot-swap hardware: The DS5020 contains hardware that enables you to  
replace a failed E-DDM without turning off the storage subsystem. You can  
continue to operate your system while an E-DDM is removed or installed. These  
E-DDMs are known as hot-swap E-DDMs.  
Installing hot-swap E-DDMs  
With the exception of the DS5020 storage subsystem initial power up, add E-DDMs  
while the storage subsystem is turned on and running. Complete the following steps  
to install hot-swap E-DDMs in the storage subsystem:  
Attention:  
v After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or reseating  
it to allow it to properly spin down. Failure to do so might cause undesired  
events.  
v The DS5020 and EXP810 E-DDMs and FRUs are not compatible with the  
DS4200 Express and EXP420 EV-DDMs and FRUs.  
1. Read the documentation that comes with the E-DDM.  
2. Check for Fault LEDs shown in Figure 79 on page 129. If any amber LEDs are  
lit, see “Solving problems” on page 153.  
128 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 79. Hot-swap E-DDM LEDs  
3. Determine the bay into which you want to install the E-DDM.  
4. Remove the blank tray by doing the following:  
a. Release the latch on the E-DDM CRU by pressing on the inside of the  
bottom of the tray handle.  
b. Lift the closed latch to its open position. (The latch is at a 90° angle to the  
front of the E-DDM when open.)  
c. Pull the blank tray out of the bay.  
d. Save the blank tray for later use.  
5. Install the E-DDM by doing the following:  
Note: The hard disk drive comes installed in a drive tray. Do not attempt to  
detach the drive from the tray.  
a. Release the latch on the drive CRU by pressing on the inside of the bottom  
of the tray handle.  
b. Pull the handle on the tray out so that it is in the open position, as shown in  
Figure 80.  
Tr ay h an d le  
Tr ay lat c h  
Figure 80. E-DDM CRU handle  
c. Slide the E-DDM CRU into the empty bay until the hinge of the tray handle  
latches beneath the storage subsystem bezel or the adjacent E-DDM CRU  
bezel.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Make sure that the EMC gasket does not snag on the bezel.  
d. Push the tray handle down until it latches into place.  
Replacing hot-swap E-DDMs  
E-DDM problems include any malfunctions that delay, interrupt, or prevent  
successful I/O activity between the hosts and the E-DDMs in the storage  
subsystem. This includes transmission problems between the host controllers and  
the E-DDMs. This section explains how to replace a failed E-DDM.  
Note: If you want to remove an E-DDM that is not in a failed or bypass state,  
always use the Storage Manager client program either to place the E-DDM  
in a failed state or to place the array that is associated with the E-DDM (or  
E-DDMs) in an offline state before you remove it from the storage  
subsystem.  
Attention: Failure to replace the E-DDMs in their correct bays might result in loss  
of data. If you are replacing an E-DDM that is part of a configured array and logical  
drive, make sure that you install the replacement E-DDM in the correct bay. Check  
the hardware and software documentation that is provided with your DS5020 to see  
if there are restrictions regarding E-DDM configurations.  
Complete the following steps to replace a hot-swap E-DDM:  
1. Use the DS Storage Management client software to print a new storage system  
profile.  
2. Determine the location of the E-DDM that you want to remove.  
Attention: Never hot-swap an E-DDM CRU when its associated green Activity  
LED is flashing. Hot-swap an E-DDM CRU only when its associated amber  
Fault LED is lit and not flashing.  
3. Put on antistatic protection.  
4. Remove the E-DDM CRU by doing the following:  
a. Release the latch on the E-DDM CRU by pressing on the inside of the  
bottom of the tray handle, as shown by the arrow in Figure 80 on page 129.  
b. Pull the tray handle out into the open position.  
c. Pull the E-DDM CRU about 1/2 inch out of the bay and wait 70 seconds to  
allow the E-DDM to properly spin down and the storage subsystem  
controller to properly recognize that an E-DDM is removed from the  
configuration. .  
d. Verify that there is proper identification (such as a label) on the E-DDM  
CRU, and then slide it completely out of the storage subsystem.  
5. Unpack the new E-DDM. Save all packing material in case you need to return it.  
6. Install the new E-DDM CRU by doing the following:  
a. Gently push the E-DDM CRU into the empty bay until the hinge of the tray  
handle latches beneath the storage subsystem enclosure bezel.  
b. Push the tray handle down into the closed (latched) position.  
7. Check the E-DDM LEDs by doing the following:  
v When an E-DDM is ready for use, the green Activity LED lights and the  
amber Fault LED is off.  
v If the amber Fault LED lights and is not flashing, remove the E-DDM from the  
unit and wait 70 seconds; then, install the E-DDM again.  
130 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before  
replacing or reseating the E-DDM CRU to allow it to properly spin down. Failure  
to do so might cause undesired events.  
8. Use the DS Storage Manager subsystem management window to verify that the  
E-DDM is shown in the Storage Subsystem Management window.  
Replacing multiple E-DDMs  
This section provides guidelines for upgrading the E-DDMs in the storage  
subsystem. Read the software documentation and this entire section to determine if  
you should use this procedure, use a modified version of this procedure, or use a  
different procedure that is provided by your operating system.  
Note: Instructions that are provided with your software supersede anything stated  
in this document.  
Attention: After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or  
reseating the E-DDM CRU to allow it to properly spin down. Failure to do so might  
cause undesired events.  
The following are methods for upgrading E-DDMs:  
v Replacing all the E-DDMs at the same time  
This method requires that you back up the data on the affected E-DDMs and  
then turn off the DS5020 storage subsystem.  
Attention: Turn off the DS5020 storage subsystem before you turn off the  
attached storage expansion enclosures.  
After replacing all the E-DDMs, you must reconfigure the new E-DDMs and  
restore data from backup. See the procedure in “Replacing all E-DDMs at the  
same time” on page 132.  
This is the safest way to exchange E-DDMs without losing data. However, this  
method might take a long time to complete because of the backup,  
reconfiguration, and restoration processes. In addition, other users are not able  
to use the storage subsystem (or any storage expansion enclosures attached to  
the storage subsystem) until you finish the procedure. You must use this method  
on RAID 0 logical drives.  
v Replacing the E-DDMs one at a time  
In this method, you manually fail each E-DDM, replace it, and wait for the system  
to restore data to the new E-DDM before installing the next E-DDM. After you  
install the new E-DDMs, you can configure them to make the additional drive  
space available. See the procedure in “Replacing the E-DDMs one at a time” on  
page 134.  
Using this method, you can replace the E-DDMs while the storage expansion  
enclosures and the DS5020 are running, eliminating the down time that is  
required if you replace all the E-DDMs at once. However, this method is more  
risky because you can lose data if the drive restoration or storage subsystem  
reconfiguration process fails. In addition, the reconstruction process might take a  
long time. This method works only on redundant logical drives (RAID 1, 3, or 5).  
You cannot use this method with any drives containing RAID 0 logical drives.  
Consider backing up your data if you use this method. This safeguards your data  
if the restoration and reconfiguration process fails or the new drive malfunctions.  
The method you use depends on the following considerations:  
v Which method most closely matches the drive upgrade procedure in the  
operating-system or the storage-management software documentation.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Which RAID level is used on the affected drives. (RAID 0 requires you to replace  
all the E-DDMs at the same time.)  
v How much downtime is acceptable as you swap the E-DDMs.  
v The number of E-DDMs in an array. Replacing E-DDMs one at a time is better  
suited for arrays consisting of 3 to 5 E-DDMs. If you have more than 10 E-DDMs  
or arrays that are comprised of high capacity SATA E-DDMs, consider replacing  
all E-DDMs at the same time.  
v How much risk of losing data is acceptable. Because the array will be in a  
degraded state during the RAID array reconstruction and copyback process as  
result of replacing a drive in the array, any new E-DDM failure will cause the  
array to fail (causing a loss of data availability and even a loss of data). The  
duration of the reconstruction and copyback process can be quite long,  
depending on the size of the RAID array.  
v How extensive will the data be changed while the array is in a degraded state  
during the RAID array reconstruction and copyback process as result of replacing  
an E-DDM in the array. The more extensive the data changes, the more work  
that will need to be performed to restore the data in the event that the array  
failed because of an addition E-DDM failed while the array is in degraded state.  
Replacing all E-DDMs at the same time  
Use this procedure to replace all E-DDMs at the same time. You must use this  
method if you are upgrading E-DDMs containing RAID 0 logical drives. All the data  
currently on the E-DDMs is lost when you replace the E-DDMs; therefore, you must  
back up all data that is currently on the E-DDMs. This procedure also requires you  
to turn off the storage expansion enclosures and the DS5020, which makes the  
storage subsystem (and any attached storage expansion enclosures) inaccessible  
to other users.  
Attention: After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or  
reseating the E-DDM CRU to allow it to properly spin down. Failure to do so might  
cause undesired events.  
To replace all the E-DDMs at the same time, perform the following steps:  
1. Read the following information:  
v The information in “Replacing multiple E-DDMs” on page 131, particularly  
the paragraphs that discuss the differences between the two possible  
upgrade procedures  
v The information in your software documentation regarding E-DDM upgrades  
and installation  
v The documentation that comes with the new E-DDMs  
Read all precautionary notes, kit instructions, and other information. Kit  
instructions often contain the most current information regarding the  
E-DDMs and their installation, plus upgrade or servicing procedures.  
Compare the kit instructions with this procedure to determine if you need to  
modify this procedure.  
2. Use the DS Storage Manager software to check the status of the DS5020.  
Correct any problems that are reported.  
3. Perform a complete backup of the E-DDMs that you are replacing.  
You need the backup to restore data on the E-DDMs later in this procedure.  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to  
avoid damage from static electricity. For details about handling static-sensitive  
devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 29.  
4. Unpack the new E-DDMs.  
132 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set the E-DDMs on a dry, level surface away from magnetic fields. Save the  
packing material and documentation in case you need to return them.  
5. Perform the following steps:  
a. Stop all I/O activity to the storage subsystem and attached storage  
expansion enclosures. Make sure of the following:  
1) All of the green Drive activity LEDs on the front of the storage  
subsystem (and on all attached storage expansion enclosures) are not  
flashing.  
2) The green Cache active LEDs are off.  
b. If applicable, use the operating system software to disconnect the storage  
subsystem logical drives from the host before you power off the storage  
subsystem.  
Attention: To turn off all power to the storage subsystem, you must turn off  
both power supply and fan unit switches and disconnect both power cords.  
Use the procedure in step 6 for the proper shutdown sequence.  
6. Turn off the power to each device based on the following shutdown sequence:  
a. Turn off power to the host before you turn off power to the storage  
subsystem. If the host must stay powered on to support an existing  
network, see the operating system documentation for information about  
disconnecting the storage subsystem logical drives from the host before  
the storage subsystem is powered off.  
b. Turn off power to the storage subsystem before you turn off power to the  
storage expansion enclosures. Turn off both power supply switches on the  
back of the storage subsystem.  
CAUTION:  
This unit has more than one power source. To remove all power from  
the unit, all MAINS must be disconnected.  
CAUTION:  
The power switch on the power supply and fan unit does not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the device. The DS5020 storage  
subsystem might also have more than one connection to power. To  
remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power  
cords are disconnected from the power supply and fan unit input  
connectors.  
c. Turn off power to other supporting devices (for example, management  
stations, Fibre Channel switches, or Ethernet switches).  
7. Use the procedures in “Replacing hot-swap E-DDMs” on page 130 to remove  
the E-DDMs that you want to replace. Use the procedures in “Installing  
hot-swap E-DDMs” on page 128 to install the new E-DDMs into the storage  
subsystem.  
8. After you install all the new E-DDMs, check the system documentation for the  
hardware devices that you intend to power up, and then determine the proper  
startup sequence. Use the following power-on sequence, where applicable:  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. Turn on the power to the supporting devices (for example, Ethernet  
switches and management stations) before you turn off power to the  
storage subsystem.  
b. You must turn on the storage expansion enclosures before the storage  
subsystem. The controllers might not recognize the correct configuration if  
the E-DDMs are powered up after the storage subsystem. For instructions  
on powering up the storage subsystem, see the storage subsystem  
documentation.  
c. Turn on the power to the storage subsystem; then restart or turn on the  
power to the host.  
9. Turn on the power to each device, based on the power-on sequence in step 8  
on page 133. To turn on power to the storage subsystem and the storage  
expansion enclosures, turn on the power supply and fan unit switches on the  
back of the storage subsystem. You must turn on both power supply and fan  
unit switches to take advantage of the redundant power supplies.  
10. Check the green Drive activity LEDs and the amber Drive fault LEDs above  
the new E-DDM CRUs.  
Make sure that the Drive activity LEDs are on and the Drive fault LEDs are off.  
Note: The Drive fault LEDs might flash intermittently while the E-DDMs spin  
up.  
v If the Drive activity LED is off, the E-DDM CRU might not be installed  
correctly. Remove the E-DDM CRU, wait 30 seconds, and then reinstall it.  
v If the Drive fault LED stays on or the Drive activity LED stays off, the new  
E-DDM might be faulty. See the DS Storage Manager software for problem  
determination.  
11. Use the DS Storage Manager software to configure the new E-DDMs. See the  
DS Storage Manager software online Help for detailed instructions.  
12. Restore the data from backup to all the E-DDMs.  
Replacing the E-DDMs one at a time  
Use this procedure to replace all the E-DDMs one at a time. You cannot use this  
procedure on RAID 0 logical drives (use the procedure in “Replacing all E-DDMs at  
the same time” on page 132).  
Note: If your storage subsystem has hot spares assigned, you might want to  
unassign the hot spares while you perform this procedure. If you do not,  
reconstruction might start on the hot spare before you insert the new  
E-DDM. The data on the new E-DDM is still rebuilt, but the process takes  
longer for each E-DDM. Remember to reassign the hot spares when you are  
finished with this procedure.  
Attention: After you remove an E-DDM CRU, wait 70 seconds before replacing or  
reseating the E-DDM CRU to allow it to properly spin down. Failure to do so might  
cause undesired events.  
To replace the E-DDMs one at a time, perform the following steps:  
1. Read the following information:  
v “Replacing multiple E-DDMs” on page 131, particularly the paragraphs that  
discuss the differences between the two possible upgrade procedures  
v Your software documentation regarding E-DDM upgrades and installation  
v The documentation that comes with the new E-DDMs  
134 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Read all precautionary notes, kit instructions, and other information. Kit  
instructions often contain the most current information regarding the  
E-DDMs and their installation, plus upgrade or servicing procedures.  
Compare the kit instructions with this procedure to determine if you need to  
modify this procedure.  
2. Use the DS Storage Manager software to check the status of the unit. Correct  
any problems that are reported.  
3. Back up the data in the arrays and logical drives that are configured using the  
E-DDMs that you are replacing.  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to  
avoid damage from static electricity. For details about handling static-sensitive  
devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 29.  
4. Unpack the new E-DDMs.  
Set the E-DDMs on a dry, level surface away from magnetic fields. Save the  
packing material and documentation in case you need to return the E-DDMs.  
5. Use the DS Storage Manager software to make sure that the array that was  
defined using these E-DDMs is in optimal (not degraded) state before manually  
failing the first E-DDM you want to replace. If the array is in degraded state,  
use the recovery procedures to bring the array into the optimal state.  
Make sure of the following:  
v You fail only one E-DDM.  
v The software status display shows a failed status for the applicable E-DDM.  
v The amber Drive fault LED (on the front bezel below the E-DDM) is on.  
Attention: Removing the wrong E-DDM can cause data loss. Make sure that  
you remove only the failed E-DDM CRU. To identify the failed E-DDM CRU,  
look for the lit Drive fault LED.  
If you remove an active E-DDM accidentally, wait at least 30 seconds and then  
reinstall it. Because you failed two E-DDMs in a RAID array, the array might be  
marked failed by the controller. This array will not be available to the host for  
I/O. See the DS Storage Manager software for further recovery instructions. Do  
not attempt to replace any E-DDMs until the array is brought back to optimal  
state.  
6. Use the procedures in “Replacing hot-swap E-DDMs” on page 130 to remove  
the failed E-DDM. Use the procedures in “Installing hot-swap E-DDMs” on  
page 128 to install the new E-DDMs into the storage subsystem.  
The new E-DDM automatically reconstructs the data after you install it in the  
drive slot.  
During data reconstruction, the amber Drive fault LED might come on for a few  
minutes, then turn off when the green Drive activity LED begins flashing. A  
flashing Drive activity LED indicates that data reconstruction is in progress.  
Note: If your storage subsystem has active hot spares, data might not start  
copying to the new E-DDM until the data is reconstructed on the hot  
spare. This increases the time that is required to complete the  
procedure.  
7. Check the green Drive activity LED and the amber Drive fault LED above the  
new E-DDM CRUs.  
Make sure that the Drive activity LEDs are on and the Drive fault LEDs are off.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The Drive fault LEDs might flash intermittently while the E-DDMs spin  
up.  
v If the Drive activity LED is off, the E-DDM CRU might not be installed  
correctly. Remove the E-DDM CRU, wait 30 seconds, and then reinstall it.  
v If the Drive fault LED stays on or the Drive activity LED stays off, the new  
E-DDM might be faulty or might be an uncertified drive. See the DS Storage  
Manager software for problem determination. In the case of an uncertified  
drive, verify that the drive options or drive FRU part number is correct for  
your storage subsystem.  
8. Use the DS Storage Manager software to monitor the status of the new  
E-DDM and the progress of the data reconstruction. Wait for data  
reconstruction to finish (the Drive activity LED stops flashing).  
Note: The Drive activity LED will continue to flash after reconstruction is  
finished if there is I/O activity to that E-DDM. In that case, use the host  
software to determine if the data reconstruction is finished.  
9. When reconstruction is finished on the new E-DDM, repeat step 5 on page 135  
through step 8 for each additional E-DDM that you want to install.  
10. Use the DS Storage Manager software to configure the additional space on the  
new E-DDMs.  
Verifying the link rate setting  
Important: Make sure that the link rate for the DS5020 is always set to 4 Gbps.  
The DS5020 supports only 4 Gbps FC drives.  
If a link rate problem is indicated, use the following procedure to verify the link rate  
setting.  
A link rate switch is located on the front of the storage subsystem as shown in  
Figure 82 on page 138. The link rate indicator LEDs are located on the back of the  
storage subsystem. The link rate switch is only read when the storage subsystem is  
powered up.  
Note: Do not mix storage subsystems with different link rate speed settings in the  
same drive loop.  
The DS5020 storage subsystem drive channel operates at a 4 Gbps Fibre Channel  
interface speed. The DS5020 storage subsystem SATA E-DDM CRUs have an ATA  
translator card that converts E-DDM 3 Gbps SATA drive interface protocol a 4 Gbps  
Fibre Channel interface protocol. Set the DS5020 enclosure speed to 4 Gbps when  
these SATA E-DDM CRUs are installed and connected to storage expansion  
enclosures running at 4 Gbps speed. The link rate setting speed must be set  
accordingly. See “Verifying the link rate setting” for more information.  
Do not mix 2 GB drives and 4 GB drives in the same storage subsystem. If drives  
of mixed speeds reside in the storage subsystem, the data transfer rate changes  
depending on the configuration. Table 19 on page 137 shows the data transfer rates  
for drives of different configurations.  
136 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
Do not change the link rate setting while the storage subsystem is running.  
Changing the link rate setting while the storage subsystem is running could  
cause drives to fail. You must power down the storage subsystem and  
storage expansion enclosures before changing the link rate setting.  
Attention: All devices on the loop must have the same data transfer rate, which  
means that you must set the link rate on the storage expansion enclosure to the  
same rate as the storage subsystem to which it is connected. Information about  
supported DS4000 storage subsystems can be obtained from the certified  
Compatibility Matrix, which can be found at the following Internet location:  
http://www-1.ibm.com/servers/storage/disk/ds4000/interop-matrix.html  
Table 19. Data transfer rates for drive modules  
Link rate  
switch  
setting  
Storage subsystem  
with 2 GB drives  
Storage subsystem with Storage subsystem with  
4 GB drives  
mixed drives  
4 Gbps  
Drives do not come  
online.  
Drives work in 4 Gbps  
mode.  
2 GB drives do not come  
online.  
4 GB drives work in 4 Gbps  
mode.  
Use the following procedure to check the current setting of the data transfer rate  
and change it, if necessary:  
1. Complete the power-off sequence described in “Turning off the storage  
subsystem” on page 109 ensuring that the DS5020 storage subsystem is  
turned off before any attached storage expansion enclosures.  
2. Locate the link rate indicator LEDs. Figure 81 shows the location of the link  
rate indicator lights on the back of the storage subsystem.  
Link  
Rate  
LEDs  
Two on = 4 Gbps  
One on = 2 Gbps  
Figure 81. Link rate LEDs  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If both link rate indicator LEDs are on, the data transfer rate is set for 4 Gbps.  
If one link rate indicator light is on, the data transfer rate is set for 2 Gbps.  
Important: Make sure that the link rate for the DS5020 is always set to 4  
Gbps. The DS5020 supports only 4 Gbps FC drives.  
3. Is the data transfer rate set correctly?  
Note: Make sure that the link rate for the DS5020 is always set to 4 Gbps.  
v Yes - Go to step 8.  
v No - Go to step 5 to change the setting.  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to  
avoid damage from static electricity. For details about handling static-sensitive  
devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 29.  
4. Locate the link rate switch. Figure 81 on page 137 shows the location of the  
link rate indicator light on the front of the command module.  
Link Rate sw itch  
(2 Gbpsor 4 Gbps)  
Figure 82. Link rate switch  
5. Change the link rate switch setting by doing the following:  
a. Put on antistatic protection.  
b. Use a small screwdriver or the tip of a ball point pen to slide the link rate  
switch to the left or right to set the desired Fibre Channel operating speed.  
Attention: Although the link rate LED indicates the correct speed setting,  
the link rate speed does not change until after you cycle power to the  
storage subsystem.  
6. Repeat step 1 on page 137 through step 5 for all of the storage subsystems in  
the configuration.  
7. Perform the power-on sequence as described in “Turning on the storage  
subsystem” on page 95.  
8. Check the indicator lights on the front and back of all of the storage subsystem  
and expansion drive modules. All the green indicator LEDs are lit, and the  
amber indicator LEDs are off. (No LEDs are displayed on blank drives.)  
9. Are only the green indicator LEDs on?  
v Yes - The drive is working correctly.  
v No - If an amber Fault indicator LED is on, go to 10.  
10. Diagnose and correct the fault.  
a. To run the Recovery Guru, select the Recovery Guru toolbar button in the  
Subsystem Management window.  
b. Complete the recovery procedure.  
138 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
c. When the procedure is completed, rerun the Recovery Guru to make sure  
that the problem has been corrected by selecting Recheck in the Recovery  
Guru.  
11. If the problem persists, contact IBM Customer and Technical Support.  
Replacing an ac power supply and fan unit  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
CAUTION:  
Disconnect the power cord before replacing the power supply and fan unit.  
The power supply and fan unit is a component that includes both a 600-W power  
supply unit and two fans. The power supply and fan units provide power and  
cooling for the DS5020. The power supply and fan units are customer replaceable  
units (CRUs) and do not require preventive maintenance. Use only the supported  
power supply and fan units for your specific storage subsystem.  
Each power supply and fan unit has a built-in sensor that detects the following  
conditions:  
v Over-voltage  
v Over-current  
v Overheated power supply  
If any of these conditions occurs, one or both power supplies will shut down. If the  
power remains off after the condition that causes it to go off, make sure that the  
environment is optimal (no overheating has occurred, all electrical outlets are  
working, and so on). For more information, see “Restoring power after an  
unexpected shutdown” on page 112.  
The storage subsystem cooling system consists of two fans in each of the two  
power supply and fan unit CRUs. The power supply and fan units circulate air from  
the front to the back of the unit.  
If both power supply and fan units fail, or if the power supply and fan units cannot  
maintain an internal temperature below 68° C (154° F), the power supply and fan  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
units in the unit will automatically shut down (an over-temperature condition). If this  
occurs, you must cool the unit and restart it. See “Restoring power after an  
unexpected shutdown” on page 112.  
Attention: The fans in the power supply and fan units draw in fresh air and force  
out hot air. The power supply and fan units are hot-swappable and redundant;  
however, if the fans in one power supply and fan unit fail, you must replace the  
entire failed power supply and fan unit within 72 hours to maintain redundancy and  
optimum cooling. Do not remove the failed power supply and fan unit until you have  
the replacement power supply and fan unit. When you do remove the failed power  
supply and fan unit, be sure to install the second power supply and fan unit within  
10 minutes to prevent any overheating due to the interruption to the air flow that  
cools the storage subsystem.  
Do not run the storage subsystem without adequate ventilation and cooling,  
because it might cause damage to the internal components and circuitry.  
Use the following procedure to replace an ac power supply and fan unit. Figure 83  
on page 143 illustrates removing and inserting a unit.  
Attention: Potential damage to a component - To prevent damage from  
overheating, replace a failed power supply and fan unit CRU within 15 minutes of  
removal. If replacing it will take longer than 15 minutes, stop all I/O activity to the  
storage subsystem and turn off the power until you complete the replacement.  
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply and fan unit or any part that has  
the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
1. If needed, use the DS Storage Manager client software to print a storage  
system profile.  
2. Did the Recovery Guru direct you to replace a failed power supply and fan  
unit?  
v Yes - Go to step 3.  
v No - Run the Recovery Guru to identify the failed component, and then go  
to step 3.  
3. Put on antistatic protection.  
140 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Unpack the new power supply and fan unit. Save all packing material in case  
you need to return the failed power supply and fan unit CRU.  
Note: The new power supply and fan unit CRU comes with an instruction  
sheet and label sheet. The instruction sheet provides instructions on  
placing the applicable labels on the power supply and fan unit CRU to  
mark the LEDs correctly. The label sheet contains the peel-off labels  
that you actually place on the power supply and fan unit CRU.  
5. Using the information provided on the instruction sheet, place the labels on the  
power supply and fan unit CRU to correctly mark the LEDs.  
6. Turn off the power switch on the new unit.  
7. Check the Fault LED to locate the failed power supply and fan unit. If a fault is  
detected, the amber Fault LED is on.  
8. Verify that the Service Action Allowed LED is on. Do not remove the power  
supply and fan unit if the LED is off. For more information about the Service  
Action Allowed LED, see “Service Action Allowed Status LED” on page 121.  
Statement 1:  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is  
hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,  
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical  
storm.  
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical  
outlet.  
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be  
attached to this product.  
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal  
cables.  
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water,  
or structural damage.  
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,  
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless  
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration  
procedures.  
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table  
when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or  
attached devices.  
To Connect:  
To Disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
9. Turn off the power switch, and unplug the power cord from the failed power  
supply and fan unit.  
10. Squeeze the latch and pull the lever open 90° (so that the lever is horizontal)  
to release the power supply and fan unit from the latch. The latch is a coral  
colored tab on the lever.  
11. Slowly pull the lever away from the chassis to remove the power supply and  
fan unit, as shown in Figure 83 on page 143.  
Note: The lever rotates upward or downward 90°, depending on whether the  
power supply and fan unit you are removing is in the right or left power  
supply and fan unit bay.  
12. Slide the new unit into the empty slot. As you slide the power supply and fan  
unit into the empty slot, make sure the guide pins on the side of the power  
supply and fan unit fit into the notches. After the guide pins fit into the notches  
and power supply and fan unit fits snugly into the slot, push the lever  
downward or upward 90° to fully latch the power supply and fan unit into place,  
depending on whether you are inserting the power supply and fan unit into the  
right or left power supply and fan unit bay. Then gently push the front of the  
power supply and fan unit to make sure that it is fully seated.  
142 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attention: The left and right power supply and fan units are seated in the  
DS5020 chassis in opposite orientations. If you cannot fully insert the power  
supply and fan unit into the power supply and fan unit bay, flip it 180° and  
reinsert it. Make sure that the levers lock into place in the storage subsystem  
chassis. Do not force fit. The power supply and fan unit is designed to prevent  
it from being inserted into the chassis incorrectly.  
13. Plug in the power cord and turn on the power.  
14. Check the Power and Fault LEDs on the new unit.  
Lever  
Latch  
Figure 83. Replacing a power supply and fan unit  
15. Based on the status of the Power and Fault LEDs, choose one of the following  
steps:  
v Fault LED is on and ac and power LED are off - The new unit might be  
installed incorrectly. The power supply and fan unit switch might not be  
turned on. The power cord plug might not be fully inserted into the power  
outlet or the power supply and fan unit ac socket. There is not any power to  
the outlet that the power supply-unit is connected to. The power cord might  
be faulty. Go to step 16.  
v Fault and ac power LED are on but the power LED is off - The power  
supply and fan unit is faulty. Turn the power supply and fan unit power  
switch to off and contact IBM Customer and Technical Support for another  
power supply and fan unit.  
v AC and Power LED is on and Fault LED is off - Go to step 17.  
16. Perform the following task or task(s) to resolve the problem:  
v Make sure that the power switch is turned to the on position.  
v Make sure that there is power at the ac outlet and no circuit breaker has  
tripped.  
v Make sure that the power cord is working and fully seated into the electrical  
outlet and the power supply and fan unit ac socket.  
v Reinstall the power supply and fan unit.  
If the above tasks do not resolve the problem, contact IBM Customer and  
Technical Support  
17. Complete any remaining Recovery Guru procedures, if needed.  
18. Check the status of each component in the storage subsystem.  
19. Do any components have a Needs Attention LED?  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Yes - Select the Recovery Guru toolbar button in the Subsystem  
Management window and complete the recovery procedure. If a problem is  
still indicated, contact IBM Customer and Technical Support.  
v No - Go to step 20.  
20. Create, save, and print a new storage subsystem profile.  
Replacing a battery unit  
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only an equivalent type battery  
recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a  
lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by the same  
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly  
used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Each RAID controller in the DS5020 storage subsystem contains a rechargeable  
battery unit that backs up data in cache to flash memory in the event of power  
failure.  
Use the following procedure if the DS Storage Manager client instructs you to  
replace the battery unit because the current battery has failed. You can also use the  
DS Storage Manager client to check the status of the battery. Because  
write-caching is disabled when either one of the battery units fail, replace the failed  
battery unit as soon as possible to minimize any impact due to the disabling of the  
write-caching function.  
Replace only the battery unit that is indicated as failed by the LEDs. You do not  
need to replace both battery units when the Battery LEDs indicate that only one  
battery unit has failed. If the battery is identified as failed by the DS Storage  
Manager and the battery LEDs were are lit in a fault state, use the Service Action  
Allowed menu function in the DS Storage Manager subsystem window to identify  
the failed battery for replacement.  
Important: Unlike the batteries for DS4000 storage subsystems, the DS5020  
storage subsystem battery units do not have set expiration dates. Do  
not replace these batteries after a certain usage period.  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid  
damage from static electricity. For details about handling static-sensitive devices,  
see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 29.  
Use the following procedure to replace a battery unit.  
144 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Use the DS Storage Manager client software to print a storage subsystem  
profile.  
2. Locate the RAID controller that contains the failed battery unit.  
3. Check the LEDs on the battery units to determine which of the two battery units  
has failed. (See “Battery unit LEDs” on page 103.) Replace only the battery unit  
that is indicated as failed by the LEDs.  
4. Put on antistatic protection.  
5. To remove the failed battery unit from the RAID controller, press the orange  
battery unit latch toward the black battery handle to unlatch the battery from the  
DS5020 chassis and slowly pull the battery unit from the controller chassis  
using the handle, as shown in Figure 84.  
Latch  
Pull handle  
Controller A  
backup battery unit  
Controller B  
backup battery unit  
Figure 84. Removing and replacing a battery unit from the controller chassis  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: This product contains a sealed Lithium Ion battery. Discharged  
Lithium and Lithium Ion batteries are currently designated to be disposed of in  
normal trash. However, users should contact their municipal waste disposal  
facility prior to discarding any used battery in normal trash. Alternatively, you  
can return Lithium, Lithium Ion and Lithium Ion battery packs to IBM for  
recycling.  
In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse,  
recycling, or proper disposal of used IBM Lithium, Lithium Ion and Lithium Ion  
battery packs. For information on proper disposal of these batteries, please  
contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number listed on the  
battery available prior to your call.  
For information on disposal of sealed Lithium Ion batteries outside the United  
States, go to www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/batteryrecycle.shtml or  
contact your local waste disposal facility.  
6. Place the battery unit that you removed on a level surface.  
7. Unpack the new battery unit. Set the new battery unit on a dry, level surface.  
Save all packing materials in the event you need to return the new battery unit.  
8. Insert the new battery unit into the controller chassis. Make sure the new battery  
unit is inserted in the correct orientation in the battery unit bay. Press the battery  
unit fully into the bay until it clicks into place. Do not force fit. The battery unit is  
designed to prevent it from being inserted into the chassis incorrectly.  
Note: The green Battery Charging LED flashes until the battery is fully charged.  
9. Once the battery is charged to the optimal state from the reduced-charge  
shipping state, the battery performs a learn cycle to access the discharge time  
of the battery. Do not turn off the power to the storage subsystem for at least 24  
hours to ensure that the battery finishes charging and completes the first learn  
cycle.  
Replacing an SFP module  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber-optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
146 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser statement  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Apparell À Laser de Calsse 1  
IEC 825-11993 CENELEC EN 60 825  
The speed of the SFP module determines the maximum operating speed of the  
Fibre Channel port in which the SFP is installed. For example, a 4 Gbps SFP that is  
plugged into a 8 Gbps-capable port will limit the speed of that port to a maximum of  
4 Gbps.  
Attention: Refer to the FRU option P/N on the SFP to identify the maximum  
operating speed of the SFP and to request the correct FRU replacement.  
Use the following procedure to replace a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP)  
module on the storage subsystem. The SFP module shown in this procedure might  
look different from those you are using, but the difference will not affect functionality.  
Figure 85 on page 148 illustrates installing an SFP module.  
Electrostatic discharge can damage sensitive components. To prevent electrostatic  
discharge damage to the storage subsystem, use proper antistatic protection when  
handling components.  
To replace an SFP module, do the following:  
1. Use the DS Storage Manager client software to print a new storage subsystem  
profile.  
2. Using the Recovery Guru, identify the failed component that needs to be  
replaced.  
3. Check the Fault LEDs to locate the failed SFP module. If a fault is detected,  
the amber Fault LED is on.  
Attention: Potential loss of data access - To prevent loss of access to  
data, remove only the SFP module that has a failed status in the storage  
management software and has Port Bypass LED lit.  
4. Put on antistatic protection.  
5. Unpack the new SFP module. Verify that it is the same type of module you are  
replacing. If it is not, contact IBM Customer and Technical Support.  
Note: The speed of the SFP module determines the maximum operating  
speed of the Fibre Channel port in which the SFP is installed. For  
example, a 4 Gbps SFP that is plugged into an 8 Gbps-capable port will  
limit the speed of that port to a maximum of 4 Gbps.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attention: Handle and install fiber-optic cables properly to avoid degraded  
performance or loss of communications with devices. For specific handling  
guidelines, see “Handling fiber-optic cables” on page 47.  
6. Disconnect the interface cables from the SFP module.  
7. Remove the failed SFP module from the controller.  
8. Install the new SFP module into the controller.  
9. Reconnect the interface cable.  
Figure 85. Replacing an SFP module  
10. Check the Bypass and Fault LEDs for the new SFP module.  
11. Based on the status of the Bypass and Fault LEDs, choose one of the  
following steps:  
v Bypass LED or Fault LED is on - Reinstall the SFP module and cables,  
and verify that the SFP module and cables are securely connected. Use the  
Fibre Channel loopback and the LC-LC connector to perform path  
diagnostics to make sure that the Fibre Channel cable is good and the SFP  
on the other end of the Fibre Channel connection is working properly. When  
finished, go to step 12.  
v Bypass LED and Fault LED are off - Go to step 12.  
12. Is the problem corrected?  
v Yes - Go to step 13.  
v No - Contact IBM Support.  
13. Complete any remaining Recovery Guru procedures, if needed.  
14. Use the DS Storage Manager Subsystem Management window to check the  
status the status of all components in the storage subsystem.  
15. Remove the antistatic protection.  
16. Does any component have a Needs Attention status?  
v Yes - Select the Recovery Guru toolbar button in the Subsystem  
Management window, and complete the recovery procedure. If the problem  
persists, contact IBM Support.  
v No - Go to step 17.  
17. Use the DS Storage Manager client software to print a new storage subsystem  
profile.  
148 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing a midplane  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
Attention: Observe handling static-sensitive device precautions stated in  
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 29 when removing components.  
Perform the following steps to replace a midplane:  
1. Complete the power-off sequence described in “Turning off the storage  
subsystem” on page 109 to make sure that the DS5020 storage subsystem is  
turned off before any attached storage expansion enclosures.  
Attention: The power switch on the power supply and fan unit does not turn  
off the electrical current supplied to the device. The DS5020 storage  
subsystem might also have more than one connection to power. To remove all  
electrical current from the device, make sure that all power cords are  
disconnected from the power supply and fan unit input connectors.  
2. Label and remove the power cords from the power supply and fan units of the  
DS5020 storage subsystem.  
3. Label the Fibre Channel cables that are attached to the rear of the controllers.  
Labeling the cables simplifies the re-cabling process.  
4. Remove the Fibre Channel cables that are attached to the rear of the  
controllers.  
5. Remove both controllers. To remove them do the following:  
a. Squeeze the controller latch and pull the lever open 90° (so that the lever  
is horizontal) to release the controller from the latch. The controller latch is  
a coral colored tab on the lever.  
Note: The lever rotates upward or downward 90°, depending on whether  
the controller you are removing is the right or left controller CRU.  
b. Slowly pull the lever away from the storage subsystem chassis to remove  
the controller from the controller bay, as shown in Figure 16 on page 38.  
(Remove the controllers from the chassis and place it on electrostatic  
discharge (ESD) protected surface.)  
c. Repeat steps 5a and 5b for the other controller.  
6. Remove both power supply and fan units. To remove them, do the following:  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. Squeeze the latch and pull the lever open 90° (so that the lever is  
horizontal) to release the power supply and fan unit from the latch. The  
latch is a coral colored tab on the lever.  
b. Slowly pull the lever away from the chassis to remove the power supply  
and fan unit, as shown in Figure 17 on page 39. (Remove the power  
supply and fan unit from the chassis and place it on ESD protected  
surface.)  
Note: The lever rotates upward or downward 90°, depending on whether  
the power supply and fan unit you are removing is in the right or left  
power supply and fan unit bay.  
c. Repeat steps 6a and 6b for the other power supply and fan unit.  
7. Label the Enhanced Disk Drive Module (E-DDM) CRUs so you know their  
physical location in the midplane.  
8. Remove the E-DDM CRUs and any blank drive CRUs if the storage subsystem  
has them. See “Removing an E-DDM” on page 39 for instructions. Place  
E-DDMs on ESD protected surface.  
Attention: Do not stack E-DDM CRUs on top of each other. Protect the  
E-DDM CRUs from vibrations or sudden shocks.  
9. Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the four front cage frame screws on  
the midplane, as shown in Figure 86.  
Front cage frame screws  
810midpl  
Front cage frame screws  
Figure 86. Front cage frame screw locations  
10. On the back of the DS5020, remove the four Phillips screws (two screws on  
each side) that hold the sides of the DS5020 chassis to the sides of the rails.  
11. On the front of the DS5020, remove the four M5 screws (two screws on each  
side) on the DS5020 chassis that hold the DS5020 to the rails.  
Attention: The unit must be removed from the rack and placed on a level  
ESD protected surface before servicing it.  
12.  
Statement 4:  
150 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Pull the chassis outward from the front of the rack and remove from the rack.  
Place it on a level surface. Look for a row of three Phillips screws on top of the  
chassis and a row of four Phillips screws on the bottom of the chassis, as  
shown in Figure 87. Remove the seven Phillips screws using the #1 Phillips  
screwdriver. Save these screws.  
Scr e w s  
Scr e w s  
Figure 87. Screws holding the top and bottom sides of the chassis to the cage frame  
13. Grasp the blue handle in the center of the front cage frame and pull it outward  
to slide the front cage frame out approximately two inches. Grab the two sides  
of the front cage frame and remove it from the chassis.  
Note: The front cage frame might be tightly secured in the chassis. Mount the  
DS5020 chassis back in the rack using the four M5 screws to hold the  
DS5020 chassis in place while you pull on the blue handle to separate  
the front cage frame from the chassis. Remove the DS5020 chassis  
from the rack and place it on a level surface after you remove the failed  
front cage frame for the next step.  
14. Unpack the new front cage frame with the midplane. Save the packaging  
materials in case you need to return it.  
Chapter 5. Replacing components 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15. Insert the new front cage plane/midplane by aligning it with the storage  
subsystem front opening and slowly sliding it into the storage subsystem  
chassis. Make sure that the front cage frame EMC gaskets do not snag  
between the frame and chassis.  
16. Tighten the four front cage frame screws. See Figure 86 on page 150.  
17. Install the seven Phillips screws (three on top and four on bottom) that hold the  
front cage frame to the EXP810 chassis that you removed in step 12 on page  
150, as shown in Figure 87 on page 151.  
18. Push the chassis all the way back into the rail and install the four M5 screws  
along the side edges of the DS5020 chassis.  
19. Install the four Phillips screws on the back along the sides of the DS5020  
chassis that hold the DS5020 to the rails.  
20. Insert the E-DDM CRUs. Be sure you insert them in the correct slots. Use the  
labels you put on them before you removed them to guide you.  
21. Re-insert the controllers and reconnect the Fibre Channel cables.  
22. Re-insert the power supply and fan units and reconnect the power supply  
cords.  
23. Turn on the power to the attached storage expansion enclosures.  
24. Wait at least 3 minutes and then turn on the power to the DS5020 storage  
subsystem. Verify the status of the configuration using LEDs and the DS  
Storage Manager client program.  
25. After removing the faulty cage frame with midplane assembly, transpose the  
DS5020 serial number, machine type, and model tag from the faulty cage  
frame assembly to the Repair Identification (RID) tag on the new cage frame  
assembly. The RID tag is important in transferring the serial number, machine  
type, and model from the faulty cage frame assembly to the new cage frame  
assembly. Make sure that the new RID tag is affixed to the new cage frame  
assembly before you dispose of the faulty cage frame with midplane assembly.  
This will so that the warranty coverage is not interrupted.  
152 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. Hardware maintenance  
This chapter contains information to help you solve some of the simpler problems  
that you might have with your storage subsystem. It contains the problem indicators  
and error messages along with suggested actions to take to resolve the problem.  
For instructions on how to obtain service and technical assistance for your storage  
subsystem and other IBM products, see “Getting information, help, and service” on  
page xxiv.  
General checkout  
Use the indicator lights, the diagnostics and test information, the symptom-to-FRU  
index, and the connected server Problem Determination and Service Guide to  
diagnose problems.  
The PD maps found in the IBM System Storage DS4000 Problem Determination  
Guide provide you with additional diagnostic aids.  
Solving problems  
This section contains information to help you solve some of the problems you might  
have with your storage subsystem. Table 20 on page 154 contains the problem  
symptoms and error messages, along with suggested actions to take to resolve  
problems.  
Always use the DS Storage Manager client to diagnose storage subsystem  
problems and component failures and find solutions to problems that have definite  
symptoms.  
You can use Table 20 on page 154, which contains the problem symptoms and  
error messages, along with suggested actions as a guide for troubleshooting  
problems in addition to the DS Storage Manager Recovery Guru in the Subsystem  
Management window. Do not depend solely Table 20 on page 154 for a FRU  
replacement decision.  
See the problem determination maps in the DS4000 Problem Determination Guide  
for more detailed procedures for problem isolation.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
Amber LED is lit  
Drive CRU  
(Drive Fault  
LED)  
Note: The  
green Drive  
Activity LED  
might also be  
lit.  
Drive failure  
Replace the failed drive.  
Note: The amber LED on the  
drive is also lit if the drive slot  
has a blank drive tray inserted.  
Drive uncertified  
Verify the drive option and FRU  
part number to verify that it is  
supported by the DS5020 storage  
subsystem. (For FRU part  
numbers, see Table 21 on page  
161.)  
RAID controller RAID controller  
Replace the RAID controller. See  
your controller documentation for  
more information. See Chapter 5,  
“Replacing components,” on page  
121 for more information.  
(Fault LED)  
Note:  
failure  
Controller  
Service Action  
Allowed LED  
will also be lit.  
Controller was  
placed offline by a  
user or the other  
controller.  
Use the menu function in the  
DS5020 Subsystem Management  
window to place the controller  
back online. If the controller  
continues going to an offline state  
after being placed online, replace  
the RAID controller.  
Unsupported  
Use the Storage Manager Client  
controller type. For Subsystem Management window  
example, a DS4200 and Recovery Guru to verify that  
Express FRU is  
inserted into a  
DS5020 chassis.  
the correct controller FRU is  
used. Replace with the correct  
DS5020 controller FRU.  
RAID controller No incoming signal Reconnect the SFP modules and  
(Port Bypass  
LED)  
detected  
the Fibre Channel cables. Verify  
the input and output SFP using  
the path failure determination  
instruction in the DS4000  
Problem Determination Guide  
and the Fibre Channel loopback  
and female-female LC connector.  
Replace either input or output  
SFP modules or Fibre Channel  
cables as necessary.  
Incorrect enclosure When connecting storage  
speed setting  
expansion enclosures to the  
existing operating redundant  
drive loop with a different speed  
setting, the port goes into bypass  
mode because mixing different  
speed enclosures within the  
same redundant drive  
loop/channel is not supported.  
RAID controller  
failure  
If the RAID controller Fault LED  
is lit, also replace the RAID  
controller.  
154 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index (continued)  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
Amber LED is lit  
(continued)  
Front panel  
General machine  
fault  
A Fault LED is lit somewhere on  
the storage subsystem (check for  
Amber LEDs on CRUs).  
(Global  
Summary Fault  
LED)  
General machine  
fault (continued)  
Open the DS5020 Storage  
Subsystem Management window  
and click on the Recovery Guru  
to see problems in the DS5020  
configuration.  
Some errors will cause the  
Global Summary Fault LED to be  
lit but will not cause any  
individual CRU Fault LEDs to be  
lit. (Drive PFA exceeded or  
nominal temperature exceeded  
errors are a few examples.)  
Follow the corrective actions in  
the Recovery Guru window.  
Fibre Channel  
connection failure  
Check that the CRUs are  
properly installed. If none of the  
amber LEDs are lit on any of the  
CRUs, this indicates an SFP  
module transmission fault in the  
storage subsystem. Replace the  
failed SFP module. See the DS  
Storage Manager software  
documentation for more  
information.  
Battery unit  
fault  
Battery unit failure  
Verify the failure using DS  
Storage Manager Client and  
replace the failing battery.  
Amber LED is lit  
and green LED is CRU  
off  
Power supply  
The power switch is Replace the failed power supply  
turned off or there is or turn on all power supply  
an ac power failure. switches.  
Amber and green Power supply  
Power supply failure Replace the failed power supply.  
LEDs are lit  
CRU  
Operating  
environment is too  
hot  
Cool down the environment.  
(Fault and  
Power LEDs lit;  
SAA lit; Direct  
Current Enable  
LED is not lit)  
Fan failure  
Replace the power supply and  
fan unit CRU  
All amber and  
green LEDs are  
slowly flashing  
All drive CRUs The DS5020 controllers are going through start-of-day  
process (booting up). Wait up to five minutes for the  
controllers to complete the booting process. If the drive  
Activity LEDs are not steady lit or momentarily flicker,  
and the amber LEDs are unlit after waiting more than  
six minutes, contact IBM support.  
Chapter 6. Hardware maintenance 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index (continued)  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
All green LEDs  
are off  
All CRUs  
Subsystem power is Check that all storage subsystem  
off  
power cables are plugged in and  
the power switches are on. If  
applicable, check that the main  
circuit breakers for the rack are  
powered on.  
AC power failure  
Check the main circuit breaker  
and ac outlet.  
Power supply failure Replace the power supply.  
Operating  
environment is too  
hot  
Cool down the environment.  
Amber LED is  
flashing  
Drive CRUs  
(Fault LED lit)  
Drive identity is in  
process  
No corrective action needed.  
RAID controller A Fibre Channel  
Use the Read Link Status  
port bypass  
loop initialization  
process (LIP) is  
window in the Storage Manager  
Client Subsystem Management  
being generated in window and the storage  
the drive loop due  
to a faulty  
subsystem event logs to isolate  
the faulty component.  
component.  
Controller drive The enclosure  
Use the Recovery Guru menu  
port bypass  
LED  
speed was set to 4 function in the Storage Manager  
Gbps but the SFP  
inserted in the  
Client Subsystem Management  
window to verify the problem and  
controller drive SFP replace the SFP with a 4 Gbps  
port does not  
SFP.  
operate at 4 Gbps.  
General Fault  
LED (located  
on the front of  
the storage  
An intermittent  
failure in the  
DS5020 storage  
subsystem  
Use the Recovery Guru menu  
function in the Storage Manager  
Client Subsystem Management  
window to diagnose the problem.  
subsystem)  
configuration. The  
problem could be  
directly related to  
the hardware in the  
configuration (hard  
drive or bad cable)  
or indirectly related  
to the DS5020  
storage subsystem  
configuration (such  
as a Fibre Channel  
host bus adapter  
failure in the host  
server or the Fibre  
Channel switch in  
the SAN causing  
LUNs to be on a  
non-preferred path.)  
156 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index (continued)  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
One or more  
green LEDs are  
off  
Power supply  
CRUs  
Power cable is  
unplugged or  
switches are turned switches are turned on.  
off.  
Make sure that the power cable  
is plugged in and that the  
All drive CRUs Midplane failure  
Several CRUs Hardware failure  
Replace the midplane. Contact  
an IBM technical support  
representative.  
Replace the affected CRUs. If  
this does not correct the problem,  
replace the RAID controllers,  
followed by the midplane.  
Contact an IBM technical support  
representative.  
Front panel  
Power supply  
problem  
Make sure that the power cables  
are plugged in and that the  
power supplies are turned on.  
Hardware failure  
If any other LEDs are lit, replace  
the midplane. Contact an IBM  
technical support representative.  
Chapter 6. Hardware maintenance 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index (continued)  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
Intermittent or  
sporadic power  
loss to the storage  
subsystem  
Some or all  
CRUs  
Defective ac power Check the ac power source.  
source or  
Reseat all installed power cables  
and power supplies. If applicable,  
check the power components  
(power units or universal power  
supply). Replace defective power  
cables.  
improperly  
connected power  
cable  
Drives are part of  
an exported array.  
When the array is  
Use the Subsystem Management  
window in the DS Storage  
Manager to verify that the drives  
exported, the power are indeed part of an exported  
to the drives in the array. If they are, remove the  
array is turned off  
drives from the storage  
so that they can be subsystem as required.  
removed from the  
enclosure.  
Note: If the drives are removed,  
the empty drive slots must be  
filled with other drives or blank  
drive trays to ensure optimal air  
flow.  
Drives are  
Use the Subsystem Management  
incompatible. Power window in the DS Storage  
to incompatible  
drives is turned off  
when they are  
inserted into the  
drive slots.  
Manager to verify that the drives  
are recognized as incompatible.  
Replace the incompatible drives  
with drive options that are  
supported by the storage  
subsystem controllers. See the  
“Parts listing” on page 160 for a  
list of compatible drives.  
Drive failure  
Use the Subsystem Management  
window in the DS Storage  
Manager to verify that the drive  
or drives are recognized as failed  
by the storage subsystem.  
Replace the failed drives. See  
the “Parts listing” on page 160 for  
a list of compatible drives.  
Power supply failure Check the power supply Fault  
LED on the power supply. If the  
LED is lit, replace the failed CRU.  
Midplane failure  
Have the midplane replaced.  
Contact an IBM technical support  
representative.  
158 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index (continued)  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
Unable to access Drives and  
Incorrect storage  
subsystem ID  
settings  
Make sure that the Fibre Channel  
optical cables are undamaged  
and properly connected. Check  
the storage subsystem ID  
settings.  
drives  
Fibre Channel  
loop  
Note: Change the switch  
position only when your storage  
subsystem is powered off.  
RAID controller  
failure  
Replace one or both RAID  
controllers. Contact an IBM  
technical support representative.  
Drive or drives  
failed  
Replace failed drive or drives.  
Random errors  
Storage  
subsystem  
Midplane failure  
Have the midplane replaced.  
Contact an IBM technical support  
representative.  
Hard disk drive is Several CRUs Drive or drives  
Replace failed drive or drives.  
not visible in RAID  
management  
software  
failed  
Fibre Channel cable Replace Fibre Channel cable.  
failed  
SFP failed  
Replace SFP.  
RAID controller  
failure  
Replace RAID controller.  
Midplane failure  
Have the midplane replaced.  
Contact an IBM technical support  
representative.  
Drive CRU has  
interface problem  
with the ESM or  
controller.  
Replace the drive CRU.  
Incorrect firmware  
version  
Verify that the DS5020 storage  
subsystem has the correct  
firmware version. Refer to  
“Software and hardware  
compatibility and upgrades” on  
page 17.  
A controller has  
Replace the failed controller and  
failed in addition to ESM.  
the ESM failure in  
the drive channel  
that originates from  
the functioning  
controller.  
Chapter 6. Hardware maintenance 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 20. Symptom-to-FRU index (continued)  
Problem  
indicator  
Component  
Possible cause  
Possible solutions  
Storage expansion Storage  
enclosures are not subsystem  
attached to the  
storage  
subsystem  
The DS5020 does  
not have the  
necessary feature  
options to support  
the storage  
The base DS5020 storage  
subsystem supports up to 32  
drives, which includes 16 drives  
in the DS5020 chassis and the  
16 more drives if an EXP520  
storage expansion enclosure is  
attached. To attach more than 32  
drives, you much purchase the  
applicable feature option. For  
example, to attach one or more  
EXP810 storage expansion  
enclosures to the EXP520  
expansion  
enclosures.  
storage subsystem, you must  
have the feature option for the  
EXP810. Contact your IBM  
marketing representative for more  
information about purchasing  
feature options.  
Parts listing  
Figure 88 and provides a parts listing for the DS5020.  
1
3
4
2
9
5
8
7
6
Figure 88. DS5020 storage subsystem parts list  
160 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 21. Parts listing (DS5020 storage subsystem)  
Index  
DS5020 storage subsystem  
CRU P/N  
41Y5152  
59Y5151  
59Y5251  
1
2
3
Rail kit  
Battery  
Controller, 1 GB memory, two standard 8  
Gbps FC host ports, two standard 4 Gbps FC  
drive channel ports  
Controller, 1 GB memory, two standard 8  
Gbps FC host ports, one optional 2-port 8  
Gbps FC host card, two standard 4 Gbps FC  
drive channel ports  
59Y5252  
59Y5254  
Controller, 1 GB memory, two standard 8  
Gbps FC host ports, one optional 2-port 1 GB  
iSCSI host card, two standard 4 Gbps FC  
drive channel ports  
Controller, 2 GB memory, two standard 8  
Gbps FC host ports, two standard 4 Gbps FC  
drive channel ports  
59Y5256  
59Y5258  
Controller, 2 GB memory, two standard 8  
Gbps FC host ports, one optional 2-port 8  
Gbps FC host card, two standard 4 Gbps FC  
drive channel ports  
Controller, 2 GB memory, two standard 8  
Gbps FC host ports, one optional 2-port 1 GB  
iSCSI host card, two standard 4 Gbps FC  
drive channel ports  
59Y5259  
4
5
AC power supply and fan unit, 600 W  
42D3346  
49Y4123  
Small Form-factor Pluggable transceiver, 8  
Gbps  
6
7
AC power cord, 2.8 m  
39M5081  
42D3315  
DVDs, Firmware and DS Storage Manager  
Chapter 6. Hardware maintenance 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 21. Parts listing (DS5020 storage subsystem) (continued)  
Index  
8
DS5020 storage subsystem  
CRU P/N  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, 146.8 GB, 15,000 RPM  
drive module  
40K6823  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, 300 GB, 15,000 RPM  
drive module  
42D0417  
44X2451  
59Y5336  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, 450 GB, 15,000 RPM  
drive module  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, 600 GB, 15,000 RPM  
drive module  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, encryption-capable, 146.8 44E5638  
GB, 15,000 RPM drive module  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, encryption-capable, 300  
GB, 15,000 RPM drive module  
44E5642  
44E5646  
59Y5341  
43W9715  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, encryption-capable, 450  
GB, 15,000 RPM drive module  
E-DDM, 4 Gbps FC, encryption-capable, 600  
GB 15,000 RPM drive module  
E-DDM, 3 Gbps SATA, 750 GB HS, 7,200  
RPM drive module  
E-DDM, 3 Gbps SATA, 1 TB, 7,200 RPM drive 44X2459  
module  
9
Cage assembly  
59Y5249  
42D3315  
39M5699  
39M5700  
39M5701  
39M5914  
22R6443  
45W2222  
49Y4123  
39M5942  
39M5377  
Empty drive filler panel  
Cable, fiber-optic, 1 m  
Cable, fiber-optic, 5 m  
Cable, fiber-optic, 25 m  
LC wrap plug assembly  
SFP (shortwave), 4 Gbps  
OM3 fiber optic cable LC to LC 10 meter  
SFP, 8 Gbps  
Serial cable adapter  
Line cord jumper, high-voltage  
162 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Records  
Whenever you add options to your DS5020, be sure to update the information in  
this appendix. Accurate, up-to-date records make it easier to add other options and  
provide needed data whenever you contact your IBM technical support  
representative.  
Identification numbers  
Record and retain the following information.  
Product name:  
IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem  
Machine type:  
Model number:  
Serial number:  
1814  
20A  
The serial number is located on the bottom inside surface at the rear and on the left  
edge at the front of the DS5020.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storage subsystem and controller information record  
Table 22 provides a data sheet for recording storage subsystem names,  
management types, Ethernet hardware addresses, and IP addresses. Make a copy  
of this table and complete the information for your storage subsystems and  
controllers. Use the information to set up the BOOTP table for the network server  
and the host or Domain Name System (DNS) table. The information is also helpful  
if you add storage subsystems after initial installation. Refer to your Storage  
Manager documentation for detailed instructions about how to obtain the  
information. For a sample information record, see Table 23 on page 165.  
Table 22. Storage subsystem and controller information record  
Storage  
subsystem  
name  
Management Controllers-Ethernet and IP  
method addresses, and host name  
Host-IP address  
and host name  
164 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sample information record  
Table 23 shows a sample information record. This network contains storage  
subsystems that are managed by using both the direct-management and  
host-agent-management method.  
Table 23. Sample information record  
Storage  
subsystem name method  
Management  
Controllers-Ethernet and IP  
addresses, and host name  
Host-IP address  
and host name  
Controller A  
Controller B  
Finance  
Direct  
Hardware  
Hardware  
Ethernet address Ethernet address  
= 00a0b8020420 = 00a0b80000d8  
IP address =  
IP address =  
192.168.128.101 192.168.128.102  
Host = Denver_a Host = Denver_b  
Engineering  
Host-agent  
IP address =  
192.168.2.22  
Host = Atlanta  
Appendix A. Records 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installed device records  
Use the following table to record the number of the hard disk drives that you  
replaced and the corresponding bay number.  
Attention: If you replace a hard disk drive in the wrong drive bay it might cause a  
loss of data.  
Table 24. Hard disk drive record  
Replaced hard disk drive serial  
Bay number Hard disk drive serial number  
number  
166 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B. Rack mounting templates  
This appendix provides duplicate copies of the rack mounting templates. If you want  
to tear out the templates from this document, use these copies rather than those  
provided in “Installing the support rails” on page 32.  
Use the following templates (Figure 89 on page 168 and Figure 90 on page 169) to  
identify the proper locations for inserting M5 screws when mounting the support  
rails and DS5020 to a rack. The locations for the M5 screws are highlighted in the  
templates.  
The DS5020 is 3 U high. Align the template with the rack at a U boundary. U  
boundaries are shown as horizontal dashed lines in the rack mounting templates.  
Note: The mounting holes that are shown in the following templates are square.  
The holes in your rack might be round or square.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 89. Front rack mounting template  
168 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3U  
2U  
1U  
0U  
3U  
2U  
1U  
DS5020  
REAR  
Rack Mounting  
Template  
Rail mounting guide  
Rail assembly  
(Rear Left)  
Rail assembly  
(Rear right)  
®
Printed in the U.S.A  
0U  
Figure 90. Rear rack mounting template  
Appendix B. Rack mounting templates 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
170 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C. Specifications for non-IBM rack installation  
The following instructions provide safety requirements and rack specifications for  
installing DS5000 storage subsystems and DS5000 storage expansion enclosures  
into non-IBM racks.  
Note: The information in this section applies to 19–inch racks. It is your  
responsibility, working with your rack manufacturer, to ensure that the  
non-IBM rack chosen meets the safety requirements and specifications listed  
in this section.  
General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM  
rack or cabinet  
The general safety requirements for IBM products installed in non-IBM racks are:  
1. Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM power distribution unit  
or mains power (via a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V ac or 60 V  
dc (considered to be hazardous voltage) must be Safety Certified by a  
Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for the country in which it will  
be installed.  
Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack or  
cabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan  
trays, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supplies, multi-outlet strips,  
or any other products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous  
voltage.  
Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the U.S.:  
v UL  
v ETL  
v CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)  
Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:  
a. UL (Ulc mark)  
b. ETL (ETLc mark)  
c. CSA  
The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer’s Declaration of  
Conformity (DOC).  
Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the  
product or product label. However, proof of certification must be made  
available to IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the  
NRTL license or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply  
the NRTL mark, the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in  
an NRTL publication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain  
the manufacturer's name, product type and model, standard to which it was  
certified, the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and  
a list of any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer’s  
Declaration is not proof of certification by an NRTL.  
2. The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal  
requirements for the country in which it is installed.  
The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over  
60 V dc or 42 V ac, energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch  
points, or hot surfaces).  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for each  
product in the rack, including any power distribution unit.  
A disconnect device might consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the  
power cord is no longer than 1.8 m (6 ft.)), the appliance inlet receptacle (if the  
power cord is of a detachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an  
Emergency Power Off switch on the rack, provided all power is removed from  
the rack or product by the disconnect device.  
If the rack/or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights),  
the rack must have an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.  
4. The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit and multi-outlet strips, and products  
installed in the rack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer  
facility ground.  
There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the power  
distribution unit or rack plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on  
the rack and on the products installed in the rack. Grounding method must  
comply with applicable country’s electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground  
continuity can be verified by your IBM service personnel, after the installation  
is completed, and should be verified prior to the first service activity.  
5. The voltage rating of the power distribution unit and multi-outlet strips must be  
compatible with the products plugged into them.  
The power distribution unit or multi-outlet strips current and power ratings are  
rated at 80 percent of the building supply circuit (as required by the National  
Electrical Code and the Canadian Electrical Code). The total load connected to  
the power distribution unit must be less than the rating of the power distribution  
unit. For example, a power distribution unit with a 30 A connection will be rated  
for a total load of 24 A (30 A x 80 percent). Therefore, the sum of all  
equipment connected to the power distribution unit in this example must be  
lower than the 24 A rating.  
If an uninterruptible power supply is installed, it must meet all the above  
electrical safety requirements as described for a power distribution unit  
(including certification by an NRTL).  
6. The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply,  
multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or cabinet must be installed  
according to the manufacturer's instructions, and in accordance with all  
national, state or province, and local codes and laws.  
The rack or cabinet, power distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply,  
multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or cabinet must be used as  
intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer's product documentation and  
marketing literature).  
7. All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, power  
distribution unit, uninterruptible power supply, and all products in the rack or  
cabinet, including safety information, must be available on-site.  
8. If there is more than one source of power in the rack cabinet, there must be  
clearly visible safety labels for ″Multiple Power Source″ (in the languages  
required for the country in which the product is installed).  
9. If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or  
weight labels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translated  
into the languages required for the country in which the product is installed.  
10. The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for  
″safe to service″ (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representative for  
assistance in determining if the environment is safe).  
172 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for  
service.  
11. Elevated service installations, where the product(s) to be serviced are installed  
between 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft. and 12 ft.) above the floor, require the  
availability of an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder. If a  
ladder is required for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-  
approved nonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been  
made with the local IBM Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m  
(9 ft.) above the floor requires a Special Bid to be completed before they can  
be serviced by IBM service personnel.  
For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, the  
products and parts that will be replaced as part of that service must not weigh  
over 11.4 kg (25 lb). (Contact your Installation Planning Representative if in  
doubt).  
12. There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing  
of any of the product(s) installed in the racks. (Contact your Installation  
Planning Representative if in doubt).  
Rack specifications  
When installing a DS5000 storage subsystem or DS5000 storage expansion  
enclosure into a non-IBM rack, follow the specifications below.  
1. The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks  
published August 24, 1992. The EIA-310-D standard specifies internal  
dimensions, for example, the width of the rack opening (width of the chassis),  
the width of the module mounting flanges, the mounting hole spacing, and the  
depth of the mounting flanges. The EIA-310-D standard does not control the  
overall external width of the rack. There are no restrictions on the location of  
side walls and corner posts relative to the internal mounting space.  
The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.),  
and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.)  
apart on center (horizontal width between vertical columns of holes on the two  
front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges).  
Appendix C. Specifications for non-IBM rack installation 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
571 mm (22.50 in.)  
Back, No Door  
203 mm (8.0 in.)  
719 mm (28.31 in.)  
Drawer Rail  
Mounting Flanges  
494 mm (19.45 in.)  
51 mm (2.01 in)  
Front, No Door  
nonibm_topview  
451 mm (17.46 in.)  
494 mm (19.45 in.)  
Figure 91. Top View of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions  
Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions  
The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of three  
holes spaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and  
12.67 mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each three hole set of vertical hole  
spacing 44.45 mm (1.75 in.) apart on center). The front and rear mounting  
flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3 in.) apart and the internal  
width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494 mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM  
Storage System or eServer™ rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see Figure 91).  
174 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Top Front of Rack  
6.75 mm min.  
6.75 mm min.  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
450 +/- 0.75 mm  
Rack Front Opening  
Hole Diameter =  
7.1 +/- 0.1 mm  
465 +/- 0.8 mm  
Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-Center  
Figure 92. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view  
Hole Diameter =  
7.1 +/- 0.1 mm  
465 +/- 0.8 mm  
Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-Center  
450 +/- 0.75 mm  
Rack Front Opening  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
12.7 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
15.9 mm  
6.75 mm min.  
6.75 mm min.  
Bottom Front  
of Rack  
Figure 93. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view  
2. The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg  
(35 lb.) of product weight per EIA unit.  
Appendix C. Specifications for non-IBM rack installation 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For example, a four EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg  
(140 lb.).  
3. AC or dc power drawers need to be support based on equipment purchased for  
the rack or cabinet. It is strongly recommended that you use a power  
distribution unit that meets the same specifications as each unit already installed  
in the rack. Each power distribution unit needs a dedicated power line. Rack or  
cabinet power distribution device(s) must meet the drawer power requirements,  
as well as that of any additional products that will be connected to the same  
power distribution device.  
The rack or cabinet power receptacle (power distribution unit, uninterruptible  
power supply, or multi-outlet strip) must have a compatible plug type for your  
drawer or device. The customer is responsible for ensuring the power  
distribution unit is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes  
responsibility for any and all agency certifications required.  
4. The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including a  
secure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinet  
rail mounting holes. You must use the IBM mounting rails that are shipped with  
the IBM product to install it in the rack. The mounting rails that ship with IBM  
products have been designed and tested to safely support the product during  
operation and service activities as well as to safely support the weight of your  
drawer or device. The rails must facilitate service access by allowing the drawer  
to be safely extended, if necessary, forwards, backwards, or both.  
Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes on the mounting flanges,  
additional hardware might be required.  
5. The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the  
front and rear of the rack, or have another means of preventing the rack/cabinet  
from tipping while the drawer or device is pulled into its extreme front or rear  
service positions.  
Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet can be securely  
bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and  
heavy row of racks or cabinets.  
6. There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around the  
rack or cabinet).  
The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front  
and rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the  
rear service access positions (typically this requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearance  
in both the front and rear).  
If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provide  
unrestrained access for service or be easily removable. If doors must be  
removed for service, it is the customer’s responsibility to remove them prior to  
service.  
7. The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.  
There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be  
opened and closed, according to the product specifications.  
Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203  
mm (8 in.) rear, door to mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front,  
571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (see  
Figure 91 on page 174).  
8. The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.  
For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a front  
door. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that  
there is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambient  
176 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
inlet temperature as specified in the server specifications. The perforations  
should yield at least 34 percent minimum open area per square inch.  
Appendix C. Specifications for non-IBM rack installation 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D. Power cords  
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use  
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and  
plug with a properly grounded outlet.  
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s  
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).  
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified  
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,  
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment  
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and  
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,  
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,  
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set  
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the applicable  
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.  
IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that  
country or region.  
Table 25. IBM power cords  
IBM power cord Feature  
Used in these countries or  
regions  
part number  
code  
Description  
39Y7931  
9800  
Power Cord (125v,  
10A, 4.3m)  
Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba,  
Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,  
Bermuda, Bolivia, Cayman Islands,  
Costa Rica, Columbia, Cuba,  
Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El  
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti,  
Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,  
Micronesia (Federal States of),  
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,  
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi  
Arabia, Thailand, Turks and Caicos  
Islands, United States, Venezuela  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 25. IBM power cords (continued)  
IBM power cord Feature  
Used in these countries or  
regions  
part number  
code  
Description  
39Y7917  
9820  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria,  
Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Austria,  
Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium,  
Benin, Bosnia and Herzegovina,  
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi,  
Cambodia, Cameroon, Cape Verde,  
Central African Republic, Chad,  
Comoros, Congo (Democratic  
Republic of), Congo (Republic of),  
Cote D’Ivoire (Ivory Coast), Croatia  
(Republic of), Czech Rep,  
Dahomey, Djibouti, Egypt,  
Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Estonia,  
Ethiopia, Finland, France, French  
Guyana, French Polynesia, Gabon,  
Georgia, Germany, Greece,  
Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea  
Bissau, Hungary, Iceland,  
Indonesia, Iran, Kazakhstan,  
Kyrgyzstan, Laos (Peoples  
Democratic Republic of), Latvia,  
Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxembourg,  
Macedonia (former Yugoslav  
Republic of), Madagascar, Mali,  
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius,  
Mayotte, Moldova (Republic of),  
Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco,  
Mozambique, Netherlands, New  
Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland,  
Portugal, Reunion, Romania,  
Russian Federation Rwanda, Sao  
Tome and Principe, Saudi Arabia,  
Senegal, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia  
(Republic of), Somalia, Spain,  
Suriname, Sweden, Syrian Arab  
Republic, Tajikistan, Tahiti, Togo,  
Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan,  
Ukraine, Upper Volta, Uzbekistan,  
Vanuatu, Vietnam, Wallis and  
Futuna, Yugoslavia (Federal  
Republic of), Zaire  
39Y7918  
9821  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Denmark  
180 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 25. IBM power cords (continued)  
IBM power cord Feature  
Used in these countries or  
regions  
part number  
code  
Description  
39Y7923  
9825  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana,  
Brunei Darussalam, Channel  
Islands, Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia,  
Ghana, Grenada, Guyana, Hong  
Kong, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya,  
Kuwait, Liberia, Malawi, Malaysia,  
Malta, Myanmar (Burma), Nigeria,  
Oman, Qatar, Saint Kitts & Nevis,  
Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent and the  
Grenadines, Seychelles, Sierra  
Leone, Singapore, Sudan, Tanzania  
(United Republic of), Trinidad &  
Tobago, United Arab Emirates  
(Dubai), United Kingdom, Yemen,  
Zambia, Zimbabwe  
39Y7920  
39Y7919  
39Y7922  
9827  
9828  
9829  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Israel  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Liechtenstein, Switzerland  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Bangladesh, Lesotho, Maceo,  
Maldives, Namibia, Nepal, Pakistan,  
Samoa, South Africa, Sri Lanka,  
Swaziland, Uganda  
39Y7925  
39Y7921  
39M7924  
39Y7930  
39Y7928  
39M2830  
39Y7929  
39Y7927  
39Y7926  
N/A  
9845  
9830  
9831  
9834  
9840  
9841  
9842  
9843  
9844  
9986  
Power Cord (250v,  
12A, 2.8m)  
Korea (Democratic Peoples  
Republic of)  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Chile, Italy, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Australia, Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, New  
Zealand, Papua New Guinea  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
China  
Taiwan  
Brazil  
India  
Power Cord 1.8m  
long  
Power Cord (125v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Power Cord (250v,  
10A, 2.8m)  
Power Cord (125v,  
10A, 4.3m)  
Japan  
Power Cord (125v,  
10A, 1.8m) -  
US/Chicago  
Appendix D. Power cords 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation  
For educational information about the DS5020 and other IBM System Storage  
products, go to http://ibmdsseriestraining.com/.  
The following tables present an overview of the IBM System Storage DS Storage  
Manager, storage subsystem, and storage expansion enclosure product libraries, as  
well as other related documents. Each table lists documents that are included in the  
libraries and what common tasks they address.  
You can access the documents listed in these tables at both of the following Web  
sites:  
www.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/disk/  
www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/  
DS Storage Manager Version 10 library  
Table 26 associates each document in the DS Storage Manager Version 10 library  
with its related common user tasks.  
Table 26. DS Storage Manager Version 10 titles by user tasks  
Title  
User tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
installation  
installation  
administration maintenance  
IBM System  
Storage DS5020  
Quick Start Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System  
Storage DS Storage  
Manager Installation  
and Host Support  
Guide for Windows  
2000/Server  
U
2003/2008,  
NetWare, VMWare  
ESX Server, and  
Linux  
IBM System  
Storage DS Storage  
Manager Installation  
and Host Support  
Guide for AIX,  
UNIX, Solaris, and  
Linux on POWER  
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System  
Storage DS Storage  
Manager Copy  
Services User’s  
Guide  
U
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 26. DS Storage Manager Version 10 titles by user tasks (continued)  
Title  
User tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
installation  
installation  
administration maintenance  
IBM System  
Storage DS Storage  
Manager Concepts  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System  
Storage DS4000  
Fibre Channel and  
Serial ATA Intermix  
Premium Feature  
Installation  
U
U
U
Overview  
DS5020 storage subsystem library  
Table 27 associates each document in the DS5020 storage subsystem library with  
its related common user tasks.  
Table 27. DS5020 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM System Storage  
DS5020 Storage  
Subsystem  
Installation, User’s  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
Quick start guide,  
Quick reference for  
the DS5020 and  
DS4200, Sections 2,  
3, and 4 also for  
installing the  
U
U
U
EXP810 and  
EXP420  
IBM System Storage  
DS5020 Quick Start  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
DS5020 Installation,  
User’s, and  
U
U
U
Maintenance Guide  
184 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4800 storage subsystem library  
Table 28 associates each document in the DS4800 storage subsystem library with  
its related common user tasks.  
Table 28. DS4800 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM System Storage  
DS4800 Storage  
Subsystem  
Installation, User’s  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
Quick start guide,  
Quick reference for  
the DS4800  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4800 Controller  
Cache Upgrade Kit  
Instructions  
U
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4700 storage subsystem library  
Table 29 associates each document in the DS4700 storage subsystem library with  
its related common user tasks.  
Table 29. DS4700 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM System Storage  
DS4700 Storage  
Subsystem  
Installation, User’s  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
Quick start guide,  
Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and  
DS4200, Sections 2,  
3, and 4 also for  
installing the  
U
U
EXP810 and  
EXP420  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4500 Storage  
Subsystem  
Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4500 Storage  
Subsystem Cabling  
Instructions  
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4500 Rack  
Mounting  
Instructions  
186 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4500 storage subsystem library  
Table 30 associates each document in the DS4500 (previously FAStT900) storage  
subsystem library with its related common user tasks.  
Table 30. DS4500 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4500 Storage  
Subsystem  
Installation, User's,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4500 Storage  
Subsystem Cabling  
Instructions  
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4500 Rack  
Mounting  
Instructions  
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4400 storage subsystem library  
Table 31 associates each document in the DS4400 (previously FAStT700) storage  
subsystem library with its related common user tasks.  
Table 31. DS4400 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4400 Fibre  
Channel Storage  
Server User’s Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4400 Fibre  
Channel Storage  
Server Installation  
and Support Guide  
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4400 Fibre  
Channel Cabling  
Instructions  
188 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4300 storage subsystem library  
Table 32 associates each document in the DS4300 (previously FAStT600) storage  
subsystem library with its related common user tasks.  
Table 32. DS4300 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4300 Storage  
Subsystem  
Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4300 Rack  
Mounting  
U
U
U
U
Instructions  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4300 Storage  
Subsystem Cabling  
Instructions  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4300 SCU Base  
Upgrade Kit  
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4300 SCU Turbo  
Upgrade Kit  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4300 Turbo  
Models 6LU/6LX  
Upgrade Kit  
U
U
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4200 Express storage subsystem library  
Table 33 associates each document in the DS4200 Express storage subsystem  
library with its related common user tasks.  
Table 33. DS4200 Express storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM System Storage  
DS4200 Express  
Storage Subsystem  
Installation, User’s  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
Quick start guide,  
Quick reference for  
the DS4700 and  
DS4200, Sections 2,  
3, and 4 also for  
installing the  
U
U
U
EXP810 and  
EXP420  
190 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS4100 Storage subsystem library  
Table 34 associates each document in the DS4100 (previously FAStT100) storage  
subsystem library with its related common user tasks.  
Table 34. DS4100 storage subsystem document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4100 Storage  
Server Installation,  
User’s and  
U
U
U
U
U
U
Maintenance Guide  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4100 Storage  
Server Cabling  
Guide  
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS5000 and DS4000 storage expansion enclosure documents  
Table 35 associates each of the following documents with its related common user  
tasks.  
Table 35. DS5000 and DS4000 storage expansion enclosure document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM System Storage  
EXP520 Expansion  
Enclosure  
Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
DS4000 EXP810  
Storage Expansion  
Enclosure  
U
Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
IBM System Storage  
Quick start guide,  
Quick reference for  
the DS5020 and  
DS4200, Sections 2,  
3, and 4 also for  
installing the  
U
U
U
EXP810 and  
EXP420  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4000 EXP700  
and EXP710  
Storage Expansion  
Enclosures  
U
U
U
U
U
Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
IBM DS4000  
EXP500 Installation  
and User’s Guide  
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM System Storage  
DS4000 EXP420  
Storage Expansion  
Enclosure  
Installation, User’s,  
and Maintenance  
Guide  
IBM System Storage  
DS4000 Hard Drive  
and Storage  
Expansion  
U
U
Enclosures  
Installation and  
Migration Guide  
192 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other DS5000 and DS4000-related documents  
Table 36 associates each of the following documents with its related common user  
tasks.  
Table 36. DS5000 and DS4000-related document titles by user tasks  
Title  
User Tasks  
Planning  
Hardware  
Software  
Configuration  
Operation and  
Diagnosis and  
Installation  
Installation  
Administration Maintenance  
IBM Safety  
Information  
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4000 Hardware  
Maintenance Manual  
¹
U
U
IBM System Storage  
DS4000 Problem  
Determination Guide  
IBM Fibre Channel  
Planning and  
Integration: User’s  
Guide and Service  
Information  
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4000 FC2-133  
Host Bus Adapter  
Installation and  
User’s Guide  
IBM TotalStorage  
DS4000 FC2-133  
Dual Port Host Bus  
Adapter Installation  
and User’s Guide  
IBM Netfinity® Fibre  
Channel Cabling  
Instructions  
U
U
IBM Fibre Channel  
SAN Configuration  
Setup Guide  
U
U
U
U
Notes:  
1. The IBM TotalStorage DS4000 Hardware Maintenance Manual does not contain maintenance information for the  
IBM System Storage DS4100, DS4200, DS4300, DS4500, DS4700, or DS4800 storage subsystems. You can find  
maintenance information for these products in the IBM System Storage DSx000 Storage Subsystem Installation,  
User's, and Maintenance Guide for the particular subsystem.  
Appendix E. Additional DS5020 documentation 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
194 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F. Accessibility  
This section provides information about alternate keyboard navigation, which is a  
DS Storage Manager accessibility feature. Accessibility features help a user who  
has a physical disability, such as restricted mobility or limited vision, to use software  
products successfully.  
By using the alternate keyboard operations that are described in this section, you  
can use keys or key combinations to perform Storage Manager tasks and initiate  
many menu actions that can also be done with a mouse.  
Note: In addition to the keyboard operations that are described in this section, the  
DS Storage Manager version 9.14 - 10.10 (and later) software installation packages  
for Windows include a screen reader software interface.  
To enable the screen reader, select Custom Installation when using the installation  
wizard to install Storage Manager 9.14 - 10.10 (or later) on a Windows  
host/management station. Then, in the Select Product Features window, select Java  
Access Bridge in addition to the other required host software components.  
Table 37 defines the keyboard operations that enable you to navigate, select, or  
activate user interface components. The following terms are used in the table:  
v Navigate means to move the input focus from one user interface component to  
another.  
v Select means to choose one or more components, typically for a subsequent  
action.  
v Activate means to carry out the action of a particular component.  
Note: In general, navigation between components requires the following keys:  
v Tab - Moves keyboard focus to the next component or to the first member  
of the next group of components  
v Shift-Tab - Moves keyboard focus to the previous component or to the  
first component in the previous group of components  
v Arrow keys - Move keyboard focus within the individual components of a  
group of components  
Table 37. DS Storage Manager alternate keyboard operations  
Short cut  
F1  
Action  
Open the Help.  
F10  
Move keyboard focus to main menu bar and post first  
menu; use the arrow keys to navigate through the  
available options.  
Alt+F4  
Alt+F6  
Close the management window.  
Move keyboard focus between dialogs (non-modal) and  
between management windows.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 37. DS Storage Manager alternate keyboard operations (continued)  
Short cut  
Action  
Alt+ underlined letter  
Access menu items, buttons, and other interface  
components by using the keys associated with the  
underlined letters.  
For the menu options, select the Alt + underlined letter  
combination to access a main menu, and then select the  
underlined letter to access the individual menu item.  
For other interface components, use the Alt + underlined  
letter combination.  
Ctrl+F1  
Display or conceal a tool tip when keyboard focus is on  
the toolbar.  
Spacebar  
Select an item or activate a hyperlink.  
Ctrl+Spacebar  
Select multiple drives in the Physical View.  
(Contiguous/Non-contiguous)  
AMW Logical/Physical View  
To select multiple drives, select one drive by pressing  
Spacebar, and then press Tab to switch focus to the next  
drive you want to select; press Ctrl+Spacebar to select  
the drive.  
If you press Spacebar alone when multiple drives are  
selected then all selections are removed.  
Use the Ctrl+Spacebar combination to deselect a drive  
when multiple drives are selected.  
This behavior is the same for contiguous and  
non-contiguous selection of drives.  
End, Page Down  
Esc  
Move keyboard focus to the last item in the list.  
Close the current dialog (does not require keyboard  
focus).  
Home, Page Up  
Shift+Tab  
Move keyboard focus to the first item in the list.  
Move keyboard focus through components in the reverse  
direction.  
Ctrl+Tab  
Tab  
Move keyboard focus from a table to the next user  
interface component.  
Navigate keyboard focus between components or select  
a hyperlink.  
Down arrow  
Left arrow  
Right arrow  
Up arrow  
Move keyboard focus down one item in the list.  
Move keyboard focus to the left.  
Move keyboard focus to the right.  
Move keyboard focus up one item in the list.  
196 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.  
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in  
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the  
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM  
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM  
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be  
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the  
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.  
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter  
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any  
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:  
IBM Director of Licensing  
IBM Corporation  
North Castle Drive  
Armonk, NY 10504-1785  
U.S.A.  
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS  
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or  
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to  
you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.  
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be  
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or  
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any  
time without notice.  
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for  
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those  
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this  
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes  
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Trademarks  
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,  
or both. If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first  
occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol (® or ™), these symbols  
indicate U.S. registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this  
information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law  
trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the  
Web at “Copyright and trademark information” at http://www.ibm.com/legal/  
copytrade.shtml.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc., in the  
United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.  
Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.  
Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc., in  
the United States, other countries, or both.  
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other  
countries, or both.  
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States, other countries, or both.  
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other  
countries.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of  
others.  
Important notes  
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other  
factors also affect application performance.  
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often  
less than the possible maximum.  
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,  
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for  
1 073 741 824 bytes.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands  
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible  
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.  
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any  
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest  
currently supported drives that are available from IBM.  
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an  
optional memory module.  
IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and  
services that are ServerProven®, including but not limited to the implied warranties  
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered  
and warranted solely by third parties.  
IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.  
Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.  
198 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include  
user manuals or all program functionality.  
Particulate contamination  
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive  
gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as  
humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the storage subsystem that is  
described in this document. Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive  
particulate levels or concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might  
cause the storage subsystem to malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This  
specification sets forth limits for particulates and gases that are intended to avoid  
such damage. The limits must not be viewed or used as definitive limits, because  
numerous other factors, such as temperature or moisture content of the air, can  
influence the impact of particulates or environmental corrosives and gaseous  
contaminant transfer. In the absence of specific limits that are set forth in this  
document, you must implement practices that maintain particulate and gas levels  
that are consistent with the protection of human health and safety. If IBM  
determines that the levels of particulates or gases in your environment have caused  
damage to the storage subsystem, IBM may condition provision of repair or  
replacement of storage subsystem or parts on implementation of appropriate  
remedial measures to mitigate such environmental contamination. Implementation of  
such remedial measures is a customer responsibility.  
Table 38. Limits for particulates and gases  
Contaminant  
Limits  
Particulate  
v The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric dust  
spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.21.  
v Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or  
greater, using high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet  
MIL-STD-282.  
v The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination  
must be more than 60%2.  
v The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc  
whiskers.  
Gaseous  
v Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19853  
v Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days  
1 ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for  
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and  
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.  
2 The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity at  
which the dust absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.  
3 ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control  
systems: Airborne contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park,  
North Carolina, U.S.A.  
Documentation format  
The publications for this product are in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)  
and should be compliant with accessibility standards. If you experience difficulties  
when you use the PDF files and want to request a Web-based format or accessible  
PDF document for a publication, direct your mail to the following address:  
Information Development  
IBM Corporation  
Notices 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
205/A015  
3039 E. Cornwallis Road  
P.O. Box 12195  
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709-2195  
U.S.A.  
In the request, be sure to include the publication part number and title.  
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or  
distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any  
obligation to you.  
Electronic emission notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to  
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television  
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement  
Notice to Customers  
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect  
connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.  
200 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any  
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
European Community contact:  
IBM Technical Regulations  
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569  
Telephone: 0049 (0)711 785 1176  
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283  
E-mail: [email protected]  
Taiwanese Class A warning statement  
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:  
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen  
Verträglichkeit  
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG  
zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.  
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu  
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM  
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für  
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der  
Notices 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne  
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.  
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:  
“Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im  
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber  
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen.”  
Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten  
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
von Geräten (EMVG)”. Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in  
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der  
EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das  
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die  
Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.  
Generelle Informationen:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022  
Klasse A.  
People's Republic of China Class A warning statement  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Korean Class A warning statement  
202 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
adapter. A printed circuit assembly that transmits user  
data input/output (I/O) between the internal bus of the  
host system and the external Fibre Channel link and  
vice versa. Also called an I/O adapter, host adapter, or  
Fibre Channel adapter.  
This glossary provides definitions for the  
terminology and abbreviations used in IBM  
System Storage DS5000 and DS4000  
publications.  
If you do not find the term you are looking for, see  
the IBM Glossary of Computing Terms located at  
the following Web site:  
advanced technology (AT) bus architecture. A bus  
standard for IBM compatibles. It extends the XT bus  
architecture to 16 bits and also allows for bus  
mastering, although only the first 16 MB of main  
memory are available for direct access.  
www.ibm.com/ibm/terminology  
agent. A server program that receives virtual  
connections from the network manager (the client  
program) in a Simple Network Management  
Protocol-Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol  
(SNMP-TCP/IP) network-managing environment.  
This glossary also includes terms and definitions  
from:  
v Information Technology Vocabulary by  
Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee 1,  
of the International Organization for  
AGP. See accelerated graphics port.  
Standardization and the International  
Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC  
JTC1/SC1). Definitions are identified by the  
symbol (I) after the definition; definitions taken  
from draft international standards, committee  
drafts, and working papers by ISO/IEC  
JTC1/SC1 are identified by the symbol (T) after  
the definition, indicating that final agreement  
has not yet been reached among the  
AL_PA. See arbitrated loop physical address.  
arbitrated loop. One of three existing fibre-channel  
topologies, in which 2 - 126 ports are interconnected  
serially in a single loop circuit. Access to the Fibre  
Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) is controlled by an  
arbitration scheme. The FC-AL topology supports all  
classes of service and guarantees in-order delivery of  
Fibre Channel frames when the originator and  
responder are on the same FC-AL. The default topology  
for the disk array is arbitrated loop. An arbitrated loop is  
sometimes referred to as a Stealth Mode.  
participating National Bodies of SC1.  
v IBM Glossary of Computing Terms. New York:  
McGraw-Hill, 1994.  
arbitrated loop physical address (AL_PA). An 8-bit  
value that is used to uniquely identify an individual port  
within a loop. A loop can have one or more AL_PAs.  
The following cross-reference conventions are  
used in this glossary:  
See  
Refers you to (a) a term that is the  
expanded form of an abbreviation or  
acronym, or (b) a synonym or more  
preferred term.  
array. A collection of fibre-channel or SATA hard drives  
that are logically grouped together. All the drives in the  
array are assigned the same RAID level. An array is  
sometimes referred to as a ″RAID set.″ See also  
redundant array of independent disks (RAID), RAID  
level.  
See also  
Refers you to a related term.  
asynchronous write mode. In remote mirroring, an  
option that allows the primary controller to return a write  
I/O request completion to the host server before data  
has been successfully written by the secondary  
controller. See also synchronous write mode, remote  
mirroring, Global Copy,Global Mirroring.  
Abstract Windowing Toolkit (AWT). A Java graphical  
user interface (GUI).  
accelerated graphics port (AGP). A bus specification  
that gives low-cost 3D graphics cards faster access to  
main memory on personal computers than the usual  
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus. AGP  
reduces the overall cost of creating high-end graphics  
subsystems by using existing system memory.  
AT. See advanced technology (AT) bus architecture.  
ATA. See AT-attached.  
access volume. A special logical drive that allows the  
host-agent to communicate with the controllers in the  
storage subsystem.  
AT-attached. Peripheral devices that are compatible  
with the original IBM AT computer standard in which  
signals on a 40-pin AT-attached (ATA) ribbon cable  
followed the timings and constraints of the Industry  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Standard Architecture (ISA) system bus on the IBM PC  
AT computer. Equivalent to integrated drive electronics  
(IDE).  
CRT. See cathode ray tube.  
CRU. See customer replaceable unit.  
customer replaceable unit (CRU). An assembly or  
part that a customer can replace in its entirety when any  
of its components fail. Contrast with field replaceable  
unit (FRU).  
auto-volume transfer/auto-disk transfer (AVT/ADT).  
A function that provides automatic failover in case of  
controller failure on a storage subsystem.  
AVT/ADT. See auto-volume transfer/auto-disk transfer.  
AWT. See Abstract Windowing Toolkit.  
cyclic redundancy check (CRC). (1) A redundancy  
check in which the check key is generated by a cyclic  
algorithm. (2) An error detection technique performed at  
both the sending and receiving stations.  
basic input/output system (BIOS). The personal  
computer code that controls basic hardware operations,  
such as interactions with diskette drives, hard disk  
drives, and the keyboard.  
dac. See disk array controller.  
dar. See disk array router.  
BIOS. See basic input/output system.  
BOOTP. See bootstrap protocol.  
DASD. See direct access storage device.  
data striping. See striping.  
bootstrap protocol (BOOTP). In Transmission Control  
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) networking, an  
alternative protocol by which a diskless machine can  
obtain its Internet Protocol (IP) address and such  
configuration information as IP addresses of various  
servers from a BOOTP server.  
default host group. A logical collection of discovered  
host ports, defined host computers, and defined host  
groups in the storage-partition topology that fulfill the  
following requirements:  
v Are not involved in specific logical drive-to-LUN  
mappings  
bridge. A storage area network (SAN) device that  
provides physical and transport conversion, such as  
Fibre Channel to small computer system interface  
(SCSI) bridge.  
v Share access to logical drives with default logical  
drive-to-LUN mappings  
device type. Identifier used to place devices in the  
physical map, such as the switch, hub, or storage.  
bridge group. A bridge and the collection of devices  
connected to it.  
DHCP. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.  
broadcast. The simultaneous transmission of data to  
more than one destination.  
direct access storage device (DASD). A device in  
which access time is effectively independent of the  
location of the data. Information is entered and retrieved  
without reference to previously accessed data. (For  
example, a disk drive is a DASD, in contrast with a tape  
drive, which stores data as a linear sequence.) DASDs  
include both fixed and removable storage devices.  
cathode ray tube (CRT). A display device in which  
controlled electron beams are used to display  
alphanumeric or graphical data on an  
electroluminescent screen.  
client. A computer system or process that requests a  
service of another computer system or process that is  
typically referred to as a server. Multiple clients can  
share access to a common server.  
direct memory access (DMA). The transfer of data  
between memory and an input/output (I/O) device  
without processor intervention.  
disk array controller (dac). A disk array controller  
device that represents the two controllers of an array.  
See also disk array router.  
command. A statement used to initiate an action or  
start a service. A command consists of the command  
name abbreviation, and its parameters and flags if  
applicable. A command can be issued by typing it on a  
command line or selecting it from a menu.  
disk array router (dar). A disk array router that  
represents an entire array, including current and  
deferred paths to all logical unit numbers (LUNs) (hdisks  
on AIX). See also disk array controller.  
community string. The name of a community  
contained in each Simple Network Management  
Protocol (SNMP) message.  
DMA. See direct memory access.  
concurrent download. A method of downloading and  
installing firmware that does not require the user to stop  
I/O to the controllers during the process.  
domain. The most significant byte in the node port  
(N_port) identifier for the fibre-channel (FC) device. It is  
not used in the Fibre Channel-small computer system  
CRC. See cyclic redundancy check.  
204 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
interface (FC-SCSI) hardware path ID. It is required to  
be the same for all SCSI targets logically connected to  
an Fibre Channel adapter.  
error correction coding (ECC). A method for  
encoding data so that transmission errors can be  
detected and corrected by examining the data on the  
receiving end. Most ECCs are characterized by the  
maximum number of errors they can detect and correct.  
drive channels. The DS4200, DS4700, and DS4800  
subsystems use dual-port drive channels that, from the  
physical point of view, are connected in the same way  
as two drive loops. However, from the point of view of  
the number of drives and enclosures, they are treated  
as a single drive loop instead of two different drive  
loops. A group of storage expansion enclosures are  
connected to the DS5020 storage subsystems using a  
drive channel from each controller. This pair of drive  
channels is referred to as a redundant drive channel  
pair.  
ESD. See electrostatic discharge.  
ESM canister. See environmental service module  
canister.  
automatic ESM firmware synchronization. When  
you install a new ESM into an existing storage  
expansion enclosure in a storage subsystem that  
supports automatic ESM firmware synchronization, the  
firmware in the new ESM is automatically synchronized  
with the firmware in the existing ESM.  
drive loops. A drive loop consists of one channel from  
each controller combined to form one pair of redundant  
drive channels or a redundant drive loop. Each drive  
loop is associated with two ports. (There are two drive  
channels and four associated ports per controller.) For  
the DS4800, drive loops are more commonly referred to  
as drive channels. See drive channels.  
EXP. See storage expansion enclosure.  
expansion port (E_port). A port that connects the  
switches for two fabrics.  
Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA).  
A
bus standard for IBM compatibles that extends the  
DRAM. See dynamic random access memory.  
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus architecture to  
32 bits and allows more than one central processing  
unit (CPU) to share the bus. See also Industry Standard  
Architecture.  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).  
A
protocol defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force  
that is used for dynamically assigning Internet Protocol  
(IP) addresses to computers in a network.  
fabric. A Fibre Channel entity which interconnects and  
facilitates logins of N_ports attached to it. The fabric is  
responsible for routing frames between source and  
destination N_ports using address information in the  
frame header. A fabric can be as simple as a  
point-to-point channel between two N-ports, or as  
complex as a frame-routing switch that provides multiple  
and redundant internal pathways within the fabric  
between F_ports.  
dynamic random access memory (DRAM).  
A
storage in which the cells require repetitive application  
of control signals to retain stored data.  
ECC. See error correction coding.  
EEPROM. See electrically erasable programmable  
read-only memory.  
EISA. See Extended Industry Standard Architecture.  
fabric port (F_port). In a fabric, an access point for  
connecting a user’s N_port. An F_port facilitates N_port  
logins to the fabric from nodes connected to the fabric.  
An F_port is addressable by the N_port connected to it.  
See also fabric.  
electrically erasable programmable read-only  
memory (EEPROM). A type of memory chip which can  
retain its contents without consistent electrical power.  
Unlike the PROM which can be programmed only once,  
the EEPROM can be erased electrically. Because it can  
only be reprogrammed a limited number of times before  
it wears out, it is appropriate for storing small amounts  
of data that are changed infrequently.  
FC. See Fibre Channel.  
FC-AL. See arbitrated loop.  
feature enable identifier. A unique identifier for the  
storage subsystem, which is used in the process of  
generating a premium feature key. See also premium  
feature key.  
electrostatic discharge (ESD). The flow of current  
that results when objects that have a static charge  
come into close enough proximity to discharge.  
Fibre Channel (FC). A set of standards for a serial  
input/output (I/O) bus capable of transferring data  
between two ports at up to 100 Mbps, with standards  
proposals to go to higher speeds. FC supports  
environmental service module (ESM) canister.  
component in a storage expansion enclosure that  
monitors the environmental condition of the components  
in that enclosure. Not all storage subsystems have ESM  
canisters.  
A
point-to-point, arbitrated loop, and switched topologies.  
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL). See  
arbitrated loop.  
E_port. See expansion port.  
Glossary 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP) for small computer  
system interface (SCSI). A high-level fibre-channel  
mapping layer (FC-4) that uses lower-level fibre-channel  
(FC-PH) services to transmit SCSI commands, data,  
and status information between a SCSI initiator and a  
SCSI target across the FC link by using FC frame and  
sequence formats.  
graphics, pointing devices, menu bars and other menus,  
overlapping windows, icons, and the object-action  
relationship.  
GUI. See graphical user interface.  
HBA. See host bus adapter.  
hdisk. An AIX term representing a logical unit number  
(LUN) on an array.  
field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is  
replaced in its entirety when any one of its components  
fails. In some cases, a field replaceable unit might  
contain other field replaceable units. Contrast with  
customer replaceable unit (CRU).  
heterogeneous host environment. A host system in  
which multiple host servers, which use different  
operating systems with their own unique disk storage  
subsystem settings, connect to the same DS5020  
storage subsystem at the same time. See also host.  
FlashCopy. A premium feature for the DS5020 that  
can make an instantaneous copy of the data in a  
volume.  
host. A system that is directly attached to the storage  
subsystem through a fibre-channel input/output (I/O)  
path. This system is used to serve data (typically in the  
form of files) from the storage subsystem. A system can  
be both a storage management station and a host  
simultaneously.  
F_port. See fabric port.  
FRU. See field replaceable unit.  
GBIC. See gigabit interface converter  
gigabit interface converter (GBIC). A transceiver that  
performs serial, optical-to-electrical, and  
host bus adapter (HBA). An interface between the  
fibre-channel network and a workstation or server.  
electrical-to-optical signal conversions for high-speed  
networking. A GBIC can be hot swapped. See also  
small form-factor pluggable.  
host computer. See host.  
host group. An entity in the storage partition topology  
that defines a logical collection of host computers that  
require shared access to one or more logical drives.  
Global Copy. Refers to a remote logical drive mirror  
pair that is set up using asynchronous write mode  
without the write consistency group option. This is also  
referred to as ″Asynchronous Mirroring without  
Consistency Group.″ Global Copy does not ensure that  
write requests to multiple primary logical drives are  
carried out in the same order on the secondary logical  
drives as they are on the primary logical drives. If it is  
critical that writes to the primary logical drives are  
carried out in the same order in the applicable  
secondary logical drives, Global Mirroring should be  
used instead of Global Copy. See also asynchronous  
write mode, Global Mirroring, remote mirroring, Metro  
Mirroring.  
host port. Ports that physically reside on the host  
adapters and are automatically discovered by the DS  
Storage Manager software. To give a host computer  
access to a partition, its associated host ports must be  
defined.  
hot swap. To replace a hardware component without  
turning off the system.  
hub. In a network, a point at which circuits are either  
connected or switched. For example, in a star network,  
the hub is the central node; in a star/ring network, it is  
the location of wiring concentrators.  
Global Mirroring. Refers to a remote logical drive  
mirror pair that is set up using asynchronous write mode  
with the write consistency group option. This is also  
referred to as ″Asynchronous Mirroring with Consistency  
Group.″ Global Mirroring ensures that write requests to  
multiple primary logical drives are carried out in the  
same order on the secondary logical drives as they are  
on the primary logical drives, preventing data on the  
secondary logical drives from becoming inconsistent  
with the data on the primary logical drives. See also  
asynchronous write mode, Global Copy, remote  
mirroring, Metro Mirroring.  
IBMSAN driver. The device driver that is used in a  
Novell NetWare environment to provide multipath  
input/output (I/O) support to the storage controller.  
IC. See integrated circuit.  
IDE. See integrated drive electronics.  
in-band. Transmission of management protocol over  
the fibre-channel transport.  
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA). Unofficial  
name for the bus architecture of the IBM PC/XT  
personal computer. This bus design included expansion  
slots for plugging in various adapter boards. Early  
versions had an 8-bit data path, later expanded to 16  
bits. The ″Extended Industry Standard Architecture″  
graphical user interface (GUI). A type of computer  
interface that presents a visual metaphor of a real-world  
scene, often of a desktop, by combining high-resolution  
206 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(EISA) further expanded the data path to 32 bits. See  
LBA. See logical block address.  
also Extended Industry Standard Architecture.  
local area network (LAN). A computer network  
located on a user’s premises within a limited geographic  
area.  
initial program load (IPL). The initialization procedure  
that causes an operating system to commence  
operation. Also referred to as a system restart, system  
startup, and boot.  
logical block address (LBA). The address of a logical  
block. Logical block addresses are typically used in  
hosts’ I/O commands. The SCSI disk command  
protocol, for example, uses logical block addresses.  
integrated circuit (IC). A microelectronic  
semiconductor device that consists of many  
interconnected transistors and other components. ICs  
are constructed on a small rectangle cut from a silicon  
crystal or other semiconductor material. The small size  
of these circuits allows high speed, low power  
dissipation, and reduced manufacturing cost compared  
with board-level integration. Also known as a chip.  
logical partition (LPAR). (1) A subset of a single  
system that contains resources (processors, memory,  
and input/output devices). A logical partition operates as  
an independent system. If hardware requirements are  
met, multiple logical partitions can exist within a system.  
(2) A fixed-size portion of a logical volume. A logical  
partition is the same size as the physical partitions in its  
volume group. Unless the logical volume of which it is a  
part is mirrored, each logical partition corresponds to,  
and its contents are stored on, a single physical  
partition. (3) One to three physical partitions (copies).  
The number of logical partitions within a logical volume  
is variable.  
integrated drive electronics (IDE). A disk drive  
interface based on the 16-bit IBM personal computer  
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) in which the  
controller electronics reside on the drive itself,  
eliminating the need for a separate adapter card. Also  
known as an Advanced Technology Attachment  
Interface (ATA).  
Internet Protocol (IP). A protocol that routes data  
through a network or interconnected networks. IP acts  
as an intermediary between the higher protocol layers  
and the physical network.  
logical unit number (LUN). An identifier used on a  
small computer system interface (SCSI) bus to  
distinguish among up to eight devices (logical units) with  
the same SCSI ID.  
Internet Protocol (IP) address. The unique 32-bit  
address that specifies the location of each device or  
workstation on the Internet. For example, 9.67.97.103 is  
an IP address.  
loop address. The unique ID of a node in  
fibre-channel loop topology sometimes referred to as a  
loop ID.  
loop group. A collection of storage area network  
(SAN) devices that are interconnected serially in a  
single loop circuit.  
interrupt request (IRQ). A type of input found on  
many processors that causes the processor to suspend  
normal processing temporarily and start running an  
interrupt handler routine. Some processors have several  
interrupt request inputs that allow different priority  
interrupts.  
loop port. A node port (N_port) or fabric port (F_port)  
that supports arbitrated loop functions associated with  
an arbitrated loop topology.  
LPAR. See logical partition.  
IP. See Internet Protocol.  
LUN. See logical unit number.  
MAC. See medium access control.  
IPL. See initial program load.  
IRQ. See interrupt request.  
management information base (MIB). The  
information that is on an agent. It is an abstraction of  
configuration and status information.  
ISA. See Industry Standard Architecture.  
Java Runtime Environment (JRE). A subset of the  
Java Development Kit (JDK) for end users and  
man pages. In UNIX-based operating systems, online  
documentation for operating system commands,  
subroutines, system calls, file formats, special files,  
stand-alone utilities, and miscellaneous facilities.  
Invoked by the man command.  
developers who want to redistribute the Java Runtime  
Environment (JRE). The JRE consists of the Java virtual  
machine, the Java Core Classes, and supporting files.  
JRE. See Java Runtime Environment.  
label. A discovered or user entered property value that  
is displayed underneath each device in the Physical and  
Data Path maps.  
MCA. See micro channel architecture.  
media scan. A media scan is a background process  
that runs on all logical drives in the storage subsystem  
for which it has been enabled, providing error detection  
on the drive media. The media scan process scans all  
LAN. See local area network.  
Glossary 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
logical drive data to verify that it can be accessed, and  
optionally scans the logical drive redundancy  
information.  
NMS. See network management station.  
non-maskable interrupt (NMI). A hardware interrupt  
that another service request cannot overrule (mask). An  
NMI bypasses and takes priority over interrupt requests  
generated by software, the keyboard, and other such  
devices and is issued to the microprocessor only in  
disastrous circumstances, such as severe memory  
errors or impending power failures.  
medium access control (MAC). In local area  
networks (LANs), the sublayer of the data link control  
layer that supports medium-dependent functions and  
uses the services of the physical layer to provide  
services to the logical link control sublayer. The MAC  
sublayer includes the method of determining when a  
device has access to the transmission medium.  
node. A physical device that allows for the  
transmission of data within a network.  
Metro Mirroring. This term is used to refer to a  
remote logical drive mirror pair which is set up with  
synchronous write mode. See also remote mirroring,  
Global Mirroring.  
node port (N_port). A fibre-channel defined hardware  
entity that performs data communications over the  
fibre-channel link. It is identifiable by a unique worldwide  
name. It can act as an originator or a responder.  
MIB. See management information base.  
nonvolatile storage (NVS). A storage device whose  
micro channel architecture (MCA). Hardware that is  
used for PS/2 Model 50 computers and above to  
provide better growth potential and performance  
characteristics when compared with the original  
personal computer design.  
contents are not lost when power is cut off.  
N_port. See node port.  
NVS. See nonvolatile storage.  
NVSRAM. Nonvolatile storage random access  
memory. See nonvolatile storage.  
Microsoft Cluster Server (MSCS). MSCS, a feature  
of Windows NT Server (Enterprise Edition), supports the  
connection of two servers into a cluster for higher  
availability and easier manageability. MSCS can  
automatically detect and recover from server or  
application failures. It can also be used to balance  
server workload and provide for planned maintenance.  
Object Data Manager (ODM). An AIX proprietary  
storage mechanism for ASCII stanza files that are  
edited as part of configuring a drive into the kernel.  
ODM. See Object Data Manager.  
mini hub. An interface card or port device that  
receives short-wave fiber channel GBICs or SFPs.  
These devices enable redundant Fibre Channel  
connections from the host computers, either directly or  
through a Fibre Channel switch or managed hub, over  
optical fiber cables to the DS5020 Storage Server  
controllers. Each DS5020 controller is responsible for  
two mini hubs. Each mini hub has two ports. Four host  
ports (two on each controller) provide a cluster solution  
without use of a switch. Two host-side mini hubs are  
shipped as standard. See also host port, gigabit  
interface converter (GBIC), small form-factor pluggable  
(SFP).  
out-of-band. Transmission of management protocols  
outside of the fibre-channel network, typically over  
Ethernet.  
partitioning. See storage partition.  
parity check. (1) A test to determine whether the  
number of ones (or zeros) in an array of binary digits is  
odd or even. (2) A mathematical operation on the  
numerical representation of the information  
communicated between two pieces. For example, if  
parity is odd, any character represented by an even  
number has a bit added to it, making it odd, and an  
information receiver checks that each unit of information  
has an odd value.  
mirroring. A fault-tolerance technique in which  
information on a hard disk is duplicated on additional  
hard disks. See also remote mirroring.  
PCI local bus. See peripheral component interconnect  
local bus.  
model. The model identification that is assigned to a  
device by its manufacturer.  
PDF. See portable document format.  
performance events. Events related to thresholds set  
on storage area network (SAN) performance.  
MSCS. See Microsoft Cluster Server.  
network management station (NMS). In the Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), a station that  
runs management application programs that monitor  
and control network elements.  
peripheral component interconnect local bus (PCI  
local bus). A local bus for PCs, from Intel, that  
provides a high-speed data path between the CPU and  
up to 10 peripherals (video, disk, network, and so on).  
The PCI bus coexists in the PC with the Industry  
Standard Architecture (ISA) or Extended Industry  
NMI. See non-maskable interrupt.  
208 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Architecture (EISA) bus. ISA and EISA boards  
plug into an IA or EISA slot, while high-speed PCI  
controllers plug into a PCI slot. See also Industry  
Standard Architecture, Extended Industry Standard  
Architecture.  
recoverable virtual shared disk (RVSD). A virtual  
shared disk on a server node configured to provide  
continuous access to data and file systems in a cluster.  
redundant array of independent disks (RAID).  
A
collection of disk drives (array) that appears as a single  
volume to the server, which is fault tolerant through an  
assigned method of data striping, mirroring, or parity  
checking. Each array is assigned a RAID level, which is  
a specific number that refers to the method used to  
achieve redundancy and fault tolerance. See also array,  
parity check, mirroring, RAID level, striping.  
polling delay. The time in seconds between  
successive discovery processes during which discovery  
is inactive.  
port. A part of the system unit or remote controller to  
which cables for external devices (such as display  
stations, terminals, printers, switches, or external  
storage units) are attached. The port is an access point  
for data entry or exit. A device can contain one or more  
ports.  
redundant disk array controller (RDAC). (1) In  
hardware, a redundant set of controllers (either  
active/passive or active/active). (2) In software, a layer  
that manages the input/output (I/O) through the active  
controller during normal operation and transparently  
reroutes I/Os to the other controller in the redundant set  
if a controller or I/O path fails.  
portable document format (PDF). A standard  
specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the  
electronic distribution of documents. PDF files are  
compact; can be distributed globally by e-mail, the Web,  
intranets, or CD-ROM; and can be viewed with the  
Acrobat Reader, which is software from Adobe Systems  
that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe  
Systems home page.  
remote mirroring. Online, real-time replication of data  
between storage subsystems that are maintained on  
separate media. The Enhanced Remote Mirror Option is  
a DS5020 premium feature that provides support for  
remote mirroring. See also Global Mirroring, Metro  
Mirroring.  
premium feature key. A file that the storage  
subsystem controller uses to enable an authorized  
premium feature. The file contains the feature enable  
identifier of the storage subsystem for which the  
premium feature is authorized, and data about the  
premium feature. See also feature enable identifier.  
ROM. See read-only memory.  
router. A computer that determines the path of  
network traffic flow. The path selection is made from  
several paths based on information obtained from  
specific protocols, algorithms that attempt to identify the  
shortest or best path, and other criteria such as metrics  
or protocol-specific destination addresses.  
private loop. A freestanding arbitrated loop with no  
fabric attachment. See also arbitrated loop.  
program temporary fix (PTF). A temporary solution or  
bypass of a problem diagnosed by IBM in a current  
unaltered release of the program.  
RVSD. See recoverable virtual shared disk.  
SAI. See Storage Array Identifier.  
SA Identifier. See Storage Array Identifier.  
SAN. See storage area network.  
SATA. See serial ATA.  
PTF. See program temporary fix.  
RAID. See redundant array of independent disks  
(RAID).  
RAID level. An array RAID level is a number that  
refers to the method used to achieve redundancy and  
fault tolerance in the array. See also array, redundant  
array of independent disks (RAID).  
scope. Defines a group of controllers by their Internet  
Protocol (IP) addresses. A scope must be created and  
defined so that dynamic IP addresses can be assigned  
to controllers on the network.  
RAID set. See array.  
SCSI. See small computer system interface.  
RAM. See random-access memory.  
segmented loop port (SL_port). A port that allows  
division of a fibre-channel private loop into multiple  
segments. Each segment can pass frames around as  
an independent loop and can connect through the fabric  
to other segments of the same loop.  
random-access memory (RAM). A temporary storage  
location in which the central processing unit (CPU)  
stores and executes its processes. Contrast with DASD.  
RDAC. See redundant disk array controller.  
read-only memory (ROM). Memory in which stored  
data cannot be changed by the user except under  
special conditions.  
sense data. (1) Data sent with a negative response,  
indicating the reason for the response. (2) Data  
describing an I/O error. Sense data is presented to a  
host system in response to a sense request command.  
Glossary 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
serial ATA. The standard for a high-speed alternative  
to small computer system interface (SCSI) hard drives.  
The SATA-1 standard is equivalent in performance to a  
10 000 RPM SCSI drive.  
optical fiber cables and switches. An SFP is smaller  
than a gigabit interface converter (GBIC). See also  
gigabit interface converter.  
SNMP. See Simple Network Management Protocol and  
SNMPv1.  
serial storage architecture (SSA). An interface  
specification from IBM in which devices are arranged in  
a ring topology. SSA, which is compatible with small  
computer system interface (SCSI) devices, allows  
full-duplex packet multiplexed serial data transfers at  
rates of 20 Mbps in each direction.  
SNMP trap event. (1) (2) An event notification sent by  
the SNMP agent that identifies conditions, such as  
thresholds, that exceed a predetermined value. See  
also Simple Network Management Protocol.  
SNMPv1. The original standard for SNMP is now  
referred to as SNMPv1, as opposed to SNMPv2, a  
revision of SNMP. See also Simple Network  
Management Protocol.  
server. A functional hardware and software unit that  
delivers shared resources to workstation client units on  
a computer network.  
server/device events. Events that occur on the server  
or a designated device that meet criteria that the user  
sets.  
SRAM. See static random access memory.  
SSA. See serial storage architecture.  
SFP. See small form-factor pluggable.  
static random access memory (SRAM). Random  
access memory based on the logic circuit know as  
flip-flop. It is called static because it retains a value as  
long as power is supplied, unlike dynamic random  
access memory (DRAM), which must be regularly  
refreshed. It is however, still volatile, meaning that it can  
lose its contents when the power is turned off.  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). In  
the Internet suite of protocols, a network management  
protocol that is used to monitor routers and attached  
networks. SNMP is an application layer protocol.  
Information on devices managed is defined and stored  
in the application’s Management Information Base  
(MIB).  
storage area network (SAN). A dedicated storage  
network tailored to a specific environment, combining  
servers, storage products, networking products,  
software, and services. See also fabric.  
SL_port. See segmented loop port.  
SMagent. The DS Storage Manager optional  
Java-based host-agent software, which can be used on  
Microsoft Windows, Novell NetWare, AIX, HP-UX,  
Solaris, and Linux on POWER host systems to manage  
storage subsystems through the host fibre-channel  
connection.  
Storage Array Identifier (SAI or SA Identifier). The  
Storage Array Identifier is the identification value used  
by the DS Storage Manager host software (SMClient) to  
uniquely identify each managed storage server. The DS  
Storage Manager SMClient program maintains Storage  
Array Identifier records of previously-discovered storage  
servers in the host resident file, which allows it to retain  
discovery information in a persistent fashion.  
SMclient. The DS Storage Manager client software,  
which is a Java-based graphical user interface (GUI)  
that is used to configure, manage, and troubleshoot  
storage servers and storage expansion enclosures in a  
DS5020 storage subsystem. SMclient can be used on a  
host system or on a storage management station.  
storage expansion enclosure (EXP). A feature that  
can be connected to a system unit to provide additional  
storage and processing capacity.  
SMruntime. A Java compiler for the SMclient.  
storage management station. A system that is used  
to manage the storage subsystem. A storage  
management station does not need to be attached to  
the storage subsystem through the fibre-channel  
input/output (I/O) path.  
SMutil. The DS Storage Manager utility software that  
is used on Microsoft Windows, AIX, HP-UX, Solaris, and  
Linux on POWER host systems to register and map  
new logical drives to the operating system. In Microsoft  
Windows, it also contains a utility to flush the cached  
data of the operating system for a particular drive before  
creating a FlashCopy.  
storage partition. Storage subsystem logical drives  
that are visible to a host computer or are shared among  
host computers that are part of a host group.  
small computer system interface (SCSI). A standard  
hardware interface that enables a variety of peripheral  
devices to communicate with one another.  
storage partition topology. In the DS Storage  
Manager client, the Topology view of the Mappings  
window displays the default host group, the defined host  
group, the host computer, and host-port nodes. The  
host port, host computer, and host group topological  
small form-factor pluggable (SFP). An optical  
transceiver that is used to convert signals between  
210 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
elements must be defined to grant access to host  
computers and host groups using logical drive-to-LUN  
mappings.  
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).  
A
communication protocol used in the Internet and in any  
network that follows the Internet Engineering Task Force  
(IETF) standards for internetwork protocol. TCP  
striping. Splitting data to be written into equal blocks  
and writing blocks simultaneously to separate disk  
drives. Striping maximizes performance to the disks.  
Reading the data back is also scheduled in parallel, with  
a block being read concurrently from each disk then  
reassembled at the host.  
provides a reliable host-to-host protocol between hosts  
in packed-switched communication networks and in  
interconnected systems of such networks. It uses the  
Internet Protocol (IP) as the underlying protocol.  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol  
(TCP/IP). A set of communication protocols that  
provide peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local  
and wide-area networks.  
subnet. An interconnected but independent segment  
of a network that is identified by its Internet Protocol (IP)  
address.  
trap. In the Simple Network Management Protocol  
(SNMP), a message sent by a managed node (agent  
function) to a management station to report an  
exception condition.  
sweep method. A method of sending Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP) requests for information  
to all the devices on a subnet by sending the request to  
every device in the network.  
trap recipient. Receiver of a forwarded Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) trap.  
Specifically, a trap receiver is defined by an Internet  
Protocol (IP) address and port to which traps are sent.  
Presumably, the actual recipient is a software  
application running at the IP address and listening to  
the port.  
switch. A fibre-channel device that provides full  
bandwidth per port and high-speed routing of data by  
using link-level addressing.  
switch group. A switch and the collection of devices  
connected to it that are not in other groups.  
switch zoning. See zoning.  
TSR program. See terminate and stay resident  
program.  
synchronous write mode. In remote mirroring, an  
option that requires the primary controller to wait for the  
acknowledgment of a write operation from the  
secondary controller before returning a write I/O request  
completion to the host. See also asynchronous write  
mode, remote mirroring, Metro Mirroring.  
uninterruptible power supply. A source of power  
from a battery that is installed between a computer  
system and its power source. The uninterruptible power  
supply keeps the system running if a commercial power  
failure occurs, until an orderly shutdown of the system  
can be performed.  
system name. Device name assigned by the vendor’s  
third-party software.  
user action events. Actions that the user takes, such  
as changes in the storage area network (SAN), changed  
settings, and so on.  
TCP. See Transmission Control Protocol.  
TCP/IP. See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet  
Protocol.  
worldwide port name (WWPN). A unique identifier for  
a switch on local and global networks.  
terminate and stay resident program (TSR  
program). A program that installs part of itself as an  
extension of DOS when it is executed.  
worldwide name (WWN). A globally unique 64-bit  
identifier assigned to each Fibre Channel port.  
WORM. See write-once read-many.  
topology. The physical or logical arrangement of  
devices on a network. The three fibre-channel  
topologies are fabric, arbitrated loop, and point-to-point.  
The default topology for the disk array is arbitrated loop.  
write-once read many (WORM). Any type of storage  
medium to which data can be written only a single time,  
but can be read from any number of times. After the  
data is recorded, it cannot be altered.  
TL_port. See translated loop port.  
WWN. See worldwide name.  
transceiver. A device that is used to transmit and  
receive data. Transceiver is an abbreviation of  
transmitter-receiver.  
zoning. (1) In Fibre Channel environments, the  
grouping of multiple ports to form a virtual, private,  
storage network. Ports that are members of a zone can  
communicate with each other, but are isolated from  
ports in other zones. (2) A function that allows  
segmentation of nodes by address, name, or physical  
port and is provided by fabric switches or hubs.  
translated loop port (TL_port). A port that connects  
to a private loop and allows connectivity between the  
private loop devices and off loop devices (devices not  
connected to that particular TL_port).  
Glossary 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
cabling topologies  
A
one DS5020 and four storage expansion  
enclosures 63  
one DS5020 and one storage expansion  
enclosure 59  
one DS5020 and three storage expansion  
enclosures 62  
one DS5020 and two or more storage expansion  
enclosures in a mixed configuration 66  
one DS5020 and two storage expansion  
enclosures 60  
a hot-swap E-DDM  
replacing 130  
a hot-swap hard disk drive  
replacing 130  
about this document xix  
ac power cords and receptacles 24  
ac power recovery 23  
ac power requirements 23  
ac power supply  
cabling 91  
one DS5020 and up to six storage expansion  
enclosures 64  
storage expansion enclosures and storage  
subsystem 57  
ac power supply and fan unit  
replacing 43, 139  
ac power supply and fan unit, removal 38  
ac site wiring requirements 23  
accessible documentation 199  
acoustical noise emission values 22  
airflow 13, 21, 24  
altitude ranges 21  
area requirements 19  
audience xix  
cache battery  
See battery 117  
cache memory  
cache active LED 116  
size of 116  
caution and danger notices xiii  
checking the LEDs 101  
Class A electronic emission notice 200  
components  
B
4 Gbps hard disk drives  
battery unit 15  
6
battery  
LEDs 117  
replacing 117  
battery unit  
LEDs 16, 103  
overview 15  
replacing 144  
bays  
battery units  
controllers  
power supply and fan units  
SFP modules  
weights 19  
6
6
6
6
Concepts Guide 183  
configuration, installing the storage subsystem 91  
contamination, particulate and gaseous 199  
controller  
hot-swap drive  
best practices  
7
5
blank trays 126  
board ID 99  
BOOTP server  
information record 164  
removal 37  
replacing 42  
sample network 11  
controller information 99  
controllers  
description  
LEDs 104  
8
C
cabling  
ac power supply 91  
location  
replacing 122  
cooling 24  
8
cabling rules 67  
cabling schemes  
Copy Services Guide 183  
customer replaceable units (CRUs)  
removal 36  
DS5020 and storage expansion enclosures 67  
one DS5020 and one EXP520 storage expansion  
enclosure 70  
one DS5020 and three or more EXP520 storage  
expansion enclosures 72  
6
removing a ac power supply and fan unit 37  
removing a controller 37  
removing a hard disk drive 39  
removing an ac power supply and fan unit 38  
removing an E-DDM 39  
one DS5020 and two EXP520 storage expansion  
enclosures 71  
cabling the storage subsystem  
removing E-DDMs 37  
connecting host to RAID controller 82  
connecting secondary interface cables 78  
connecting storage expansion enclosures 54  
removing hard disk drives 37  
replacing 42  
replacing the battery unit 144  
replacing the controllers 122  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DS5020  
dimensions 19  
D
data sheet 164  
environmental requirements and specifications 20  
general checkout 153  
parts listing 160  
devices, installing and replacing 121  
DHCP server  
sample network 11  
Storage expansion enclosure documentation 192  
Storage subsystem library 184  
DS5020 documentation 183  
diagnostic interface port 79  
direct management method 81  
document organization xix  
documentation  
DS Storage Manager 183  
DS4000-related documents 193  
DS4100 SATA storage subsystem 191  
DS4200 Express storage subsystem 190  
DS4300 Fibre Channel storage subsystem 189  
DS4400 Fibre Channel storage subsystem 188  
DS4500 storage subsystem 187  
DS4800 storage subsystem 185, 186  
DS5020 183  
E
E-DDM  
replacing all at same time 131, 132  
replacing one at a time 131, 134  
E-DDM CRUs 127  
E-DDM, removal 39  
EIA 310-D Type A 19-inch rack cabinet 34  
electrical requirements 23  
electronic emission Class A notice 200  
emergency shutdown 112  
enclosure ID 45  
enclosure ID settings 78  
enclosure information 99  
environmental requirements and specifications 20  
Ethernet  
DS5020 documents 193  
DS5020 storage subsystem 184  
Web sites xxv  
documentation format 199  
documentation inventory  
drive  
4
2 Gbps  
7
connecting to RAID controller 78  
amber Fault LED  
green Activity LED  
8
8
trays  
7
F
drive CRU labels 127  
drive CRUs 127  
FCC Class A notice 200  
fiber-optic cable, handling 47  
Fibre Channel  
drive information 99  
drive LED activity 128  
drive LEDs 127  
connections 84  
loop configurations 85  
Fibre Channel loop and ID  
midplane 46  
setting 45, 46  
Fibre Channel loop ID  
midplane 78  
setting 78  
Fibre Channel loop IDs 128  
Fibre Channel, definition of  
fire suppression xxvii  
firmware levels, determining 18  
firmware updates 99  
drive, hard disk  
replacing all at same time 131, 132  
replacing one at a time 131, 134  
DS Storage Manager  
documentation 183  
installing 97  
related documents 193  
using to monitor storage subsystem status 98  
DS4000  
Hardware Maintenance Manual 193  
Problem Determination Guide 193  
Storage expansion enclosure documentation 192  
DS4000 storage expansion enclosures  
enclosure ID settings 78  
storage subsystem drive cabling topologies 57  
DS4100  
3
G
gaseous contamination 199  
glossary 203  
storage subsystem library 191  
DS4200 Express  
guidelines, fiber-optic cables 47  
Storage subsystem library 190  
DS4300  
Storage subsystem library 189  
DS4400  
Storage subsystem library 188  
DS4500  
Storage subsystem library 187  
DS4800  
H
hard disk drive  
replacing all at same time 131, 132  
replacing one at a time 131, 134  
hard disk drive, removal 39  
hardware fault indicator LEDs 101  
hardware service and support xxvi  
Storage subsystem library 185, 186  
214 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Health Check process 93  
heat dissipation 21  
LEDs (continued)  
front bezel 102  
heat output 24  
link rate setting, verifying 136  
loop configurations  
host adapter, connecting to RAID controller 82  
host-agent management method 80  
hot swap  
overview 85, 87  
redundant 85  
drive bays  
7
loop redundancy, described 55  
drive LED activity described 128  
hardware 128  
hot-swap E-DDMs  
installing 128  
replacing 44  
hot-swap hard disk drives 126  
installing 128  
M
managed hub  
in Fibre Channel loop configurations 85  
in iSCSI loop configurations 87, 88  
using to connect host to RAID controller 82  
memory, cache  
replacing 44  
hub  
cache active LED 116  
size of 116  
See managed hub 82  
midplane  
replacing 149  
I
Migration Guide 183  
mixed configuration  
cabling topologies 66  
multiple drives  
IBM Safety Information 193  
IBM System Storage DS5020  
battery unit 15  
battery unit LEDs 103  
cache memory and cache battery 116  
Health Check process 93  
installing the configuration 91  
identification numbers 163  
in-band management method 80  
indicator LEDs  
during power up 101  
indicator lights  
power supply and fan unit Fault 13  
power supply and fan unit Power 13  
information record, storage subsystem and  
controller 164  
replacing 131  
multiple E-DDMs  
replacing 131  
My Support  
5
N
non-IBM rack installation 171  
notes, important 198  
notices 197  
electronic emission 200  
FCC, Class A 200  
safety and caution xiii  
static-sensitive precautions 121  
installation  
into a rack 40  
into a rack cabinet 27  
preparation 29, 36  
numbers, drive ID  
numeric display 107  
9
installed device records 166  
installing and replacing devices  
blank trays 126  
hot-swap hard disk drives 121  
interconnect-battery unit  
battery packs 117  
O
out-of-band management method 81  
overheating, power supplies 114  
overview of the product  
1
inventory checklist  
iSCSI  
loop configurations 87  
iSCSI technology, definition of  
3
P
part numbers, power cords 179  
particulate contamination 199  
planned shutdown, powering off 109  
power cord use by country 179  
power cords 179  
power indicator light  
power supply and fan unit 13  
power outage  
3
L
LC-LC Fibre Channel cable 51  
connecting to an SFP 52  
removing 54  
LEDs  
due to overheated power supplies 114  
power supply and fan unit  
described 13  
battery unit 103  
cache battery 117  
controller 104  
diagnostic 107  
Index 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
power supply and fan units (ac)  
description 13  
power-fan canister  
recovering from shutdown 114  
power, restoring after an emergency 112  
powering off  
for planned shutdown 109  
powering on  
S
safety information xiii  
safety, static-sensitive devices 29  
SATA technology, definition of  
settings  
Fibre Channel loop and ID 45, 46  
storage expansion enclosure 78  
SFP modules  
3
after planned shutdown 95  
after power supply shutdown 114  
at initial startup 95  
described 16  
replacing 146  
shock and vibrations requirements 22  
shutdown, emergency 112  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
traps 11  
problem  
determination 153  
product ID 99  
product overview  
1
site preparation 31  
small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)  
connecting an LC-LC Fibre Channel cable 52  
important information about 48  
protective cap 49  
R
rack cabinet  
EIA 310-D Type A 19 inch 34  
preparatory procedures 32  
rail installation 34  
removal 50  
removing an LC-LC cable 54  
static-protective package 49  
Small-form Factor Pluggable modules  
described 16  
replacing 146  
SNMP traps 11  
specifications 19  
specifications, fiber-optic cables 47  
startup sequence 95  
static-sensitive devices, handling 29, 121  
steps  
connecting storage expansion enclosures 56  
storage area network (SAN)  
technical support Web site xxv  
storage expansion enclosure  
settings 78  
turning on before storage subsystem 134  
storage expansion enclosures  
cabling schemes 67  
site preparation 30  
rack mounting template for DS5020 167  
RAID controller  
cache battery 117  
connecting Ethernet cable to 78  
connecting host to 82  
connecting RS-232 (serial) cable 79  
RAID controllers)  
rail installation 34  
readme files  
finding online xxiv  
records  
6
identification numbers 163  
installed device 166  
redundant drive channel pair, defined 55  
redundant host and drive loops 85  
removal of the CRUs 36  
replacing components  
connecting to storage subsystem 54, 56  
storage manager software and hardware  
compatibility 17  
battery unit 144  
controller 122  
handling static-sensitive devices 121  
Service Action Allowed Status LED 121  
replacing CRUs  
storage subsystem  
airflow 13  
checking status 101  
configuring 79  
connecting storage expansion enclosures to 56  
ac power supply and fan unit 43  
controller 42  
hot-swap E-DDMs 44  
drive ID numbers  
fans 13  
9
hot-swap hard disk drives 44  
replacing failed  
fault indicator LEDs 101  
identification numbers 163  
information record 164  
performing an emergency shutdown 112  
power supply and fan unit 13  
records 163  
restoring power after an emergency 112  
startup sequence 95  
troubleshooting 100  
ac power supply and fan unit 139  
midplane 149  
SFP module 146  
resources  
Web sites xxv  
restoring power  
after planned shutdown 95  
after power supply shutdown 114  
restoring power after an emergency 112  
RS-232 serial port 79  
turn on and turn off the 95  
turning off 109  
216 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
storage subsystem configuration  
saving  
6
storage subsystem configuration, installing 91  
storage subsystem profile  
saving  
6
submodel ID 99  
support code upgrades  
software and firmware 18  
support notifications  
switch  
5
technical support Web site xxv  
T
tasks by document title 183  
tasks by documentation title 183  
temperature and humidity 20  
temperature, maximum 114  
template, rack mounting 167  
trademarks 197  
troubleshooting 153  
no power 114  
overheating problem 114  
procedure 100  
turning off power  
for planned shutdown 109  
turning off the storage subsystem 109  
turning on power  
after power supply shutdown 114  
at initial startup 95  
U
United States electronic emission Class A notice 200  
United States FCC Class A notice 200  
updates (product updates)  
upgrades, support code 18  
5
user controls  
8
W
Web sites  
AIX fix delivery center xxvi  
DS4000 and DS5000 interoperability matrix xxv  
DS4000 and DS5000 storage subsystems xxv  
DS4000 and DS5000 technical support xxv  
IBM publications center xxvi  
IBM System Storage products xxv  
list xxv  
premium feature activation xxv  
readme files xxiv  
SAN support xxv  
switch support xxv  
Index 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218 IBM System Storage DS5020 Storage Subsystem: Installation, User’s, and Maintenance Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
Part Number: 49Y0289  
Printed in USA  
(1P) P/N: 49Y0289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Car Stereo System G4014 User Manual
Haier Flat Panel Television HL15E User Manual
Haier Microwave Oven AED 3190ET User Manual
Hans Grohe Plumbing Product 32240XX1 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Scale 95364 User Manual
Honeywell Home Security System DT7450UK2 User Manual
Hotpoint Washer HULT 963 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Personal Computer B2B94UT#ABA User Manual
Ice O Matic Ice Maker IOD 150 Series User Manual
iHome Portable Speaker IP28 User Manual